Chevrolet 2001 Express Van Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2001-Chevrolet-Express-Van-Owners-Manual-813556 chevrolet-2001-chevrolet-express-van-owners-manual-813556 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 412

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Every
2001 Express
under warranty is
backed with the
following
services:

Courtesy
Transportation

1-800-CHEV-USA ®
( For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800 )
that provides in an emergency:

Free lockout assistance
Free dead-battery assistance
Free out-of-fuel assistance
Free flat-tire change
Emergency towing

2001 Chevrolet Express
Owner's Manual

Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number C2114 A First Edition

Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Section 1

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts

Air Bag System
Restraint Systems for Children

Features and Controls
Section 2

Windows
Keys and Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission
Parking Brake
Tilt Wheel (Option)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Windshield Wipers
Cruise Control (Option)
Exterior and Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Accessory Power Outlets
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section 3

Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock

Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)

Your Driving and the Road
Section 4

Your Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking

Steering
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer

Problems on the Road
Section 5

Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle

Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck

iii

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Section 6

Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Brakes
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Maintenance Schedule
Section 7

Scheduled Maintenance
Owner Checks and Services
Periodic Maintenance Inspections

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Section 8

Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation

Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10
Service Publications

Index
Section 9

In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide
v

We support voluntary
technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name EXPRESS are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so
the new owner can use it.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9

How to Use this Manual

Safety Warnings and Symbols

Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.

CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.

vii

You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.

viii

Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY

These symbols
are important for
you and your
passengers
whenever your
vehicle is driven:
CHILD
RESTRAINT
TOP STRAP
ANCHOR

DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK

These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:

These symbols
are on some of
your controls:

MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH

WINDSHIELD
WIPER

TURN
SIGNALS

WINDSHIELD
WASHER

PARKING
LAMPS

FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS

HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER

POWER
WINDOW

DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS

AIR BAG

FOG LAMPS

WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER

REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER

These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:

Here are some
other symbols
you may see:

ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP

FUSE

BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM

LIGHTER

HORN
BRAKE

COOLANT

FUEL

ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
VENTILATING
FAN

ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES

Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Passenger Van

Cargo Van

Cab and Chassis

Service Station Guide
Cooling System
Battery
For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood

Tire Pressure

See Section 5*

See Section 6

See Section 6*

Spare Tire
See Section 5

Hood Release
See Section 6

Engine Oil Dipstick
Windshield Washer
Fluid
See Section 6

See Section 6*

Fuel Door
See Section 6*

Fuel
See Section 6*

Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6*

*For vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, see the Diesel Engine Supplement

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-10
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-24
1-25
1-25
1-34

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag System
Rear Seat Passengers

1-38
1-40
1-42
1-48
1-61
1-64
1-64
1-64

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position
Children
Restraint Systems for Children
Older Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

1-1

Seats and Seat Controls
This part tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them,
take them out and put them back in. It also tells you
about reclining front seatbacks.

Manual Front Seats

The bucket seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
with the lever located at the front of the seat.
To adjust the seat, pull the lever up to release the seat
bottom and slide the seat to where you want it. Then
release the lever and try to move the seat with your
body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.

CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.

1-2

Power Seat (Option)

Reclining Seatbacks

If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s or
passenger’s side, you can adjust it with these switches
located at the front center of the seat cushion.

To adjust the seatback, lift the front of the lever, which
is located at the inboard side of the seat cushion.

To raise or lower the seat, move the center knob up or
down. To move the seat forward or rearward, move the
center knob toward the right or left.

Move the seatback with your body and release the lever
to lock the seatback where you want it. Lean forward
and pull up on the front of the lever and the seatback
will go to an upright position.

You can raise and lower the front and rear of the seat.
To raise or lower the front of the seat, move the right
lever up or down. To raise or lower the rear of the seat,
move the left lever up or down.

1-3

CAUTION:

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.

1-4

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

Rear Seats

Removing the Rear Seat

Getting Into the Rear Seats
To make it easier for passengers to get into the rear
seats, use the fastener spot on the headliner and safety
belt sleeve. These will keep the safety belts out of the
way while people get into the rear seats.

1. Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the lap
shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed.
To do this, press the tip of a key into the release hole
of the safety belt buckle while pulling up on the
safety belt.

1-5

2. Lift the carpet/mat flap at the inboard side of the seat
base in the rear.

3. Locate the blue or yellow handle on the inboard side
of the seat base and turn it up.
4. Once the blue or yellow handle is turned up, pull the
handle to remove the locking pin.

1-6

5. Stow the locking pin on the rear of the seat base in
the hole that is provided.
6. Repeat this procedure for the pin on the other
seat base.

10. For the first rear seat, stow the safety belt latch by
attaching the fastener strip on the safety belt latch
to the trim just inside the side door. There is also a
fastener strip provided for stowing the safety belt
latch for a four-passenger bench seat, if equipped.

7. Pull the seat rearward about two inches (5 cm) and
then lift the seat from the floor rails.
8. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
9. Install the trim covers to the floor rails. These are
supplied in a cardboard box at delivery.

1-7

Replacing the Rear Seats

CAUTION:
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing it.

CAUTION:
For the remaining rear seats, stow the safety belt
latch plate on the clip at the window trim.

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After
installing the seat, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
1. Remove the trim covers from the floor rails and store
for future use.

1-8

2. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails.
Push the seat forward in the rail, hooking both seat
bases onto the pins inside of the rails.
3. To install the locking pins at the rear of the seat base,
pull the carpet/mat flap back on the inboard side to
locate the hole in the rail for the pin.

5. Insert the blue or yellow locking pin into the seat
base. Possible slight seat pushing may be needed to
line up the pin with the base. Remember, each pin
has its own side. The yellow pin must be installed
on the passenger’s side and the blue pin on the
driver’s side.
4. Remove the pin from its stowed position on the seat
base while holding the carpet/mat flap back.

1-9

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.

CAUTION:

6. Turn the blue or yellow handle down until it is in
the retaining clip.
7. Put the carpet/mat flap back in its original position.
8. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
9. Connect the quick-release latch plates for the
lap-shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates into
the buckles attached at the outboard positions of the
bench seat. Do not twist the belt.
10. Check that both locking pins are locked into place
before operating the vehicle.

1-10

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!

Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.

1-11

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.

1-12

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-13

or the instrument panel ...

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-14

Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.

If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

1-15

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual
called “Children.” Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

1-16

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.

1-17

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.

To move it down, push in at the top of the arrows and
move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can
move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pushing in to make
sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

1-18

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.

The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-19

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-20

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied at the
abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.

The belt is over an armrest.

1-21

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.

The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-22

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.

The belt is twisted across the body.

1-23

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-24

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.

Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier
in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.

1-25

If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel but it doesn’t say AIR BAG on the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger’s seat, your
vehicle has an air bag for the driver only.
If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel, but there is no right front passenger seat, your
vehicle has an air bag for the driver only.
If it doesn’t say AIR BAG on the middle part of the
steering wheel, your vehicle doesn’t have air bags.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and
comply with federal regulations.
If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel and AIR BAG on the instrument panel in front of
the right front passenger’s seat, your vehicle has two air
bags -- one air bag for the driver and another air bag for
the right front passenger.

1-26

Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:

CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are
designed to work only in moderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all
in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, air
bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or
not there’s an air bag for that person.

CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, as you would be if you were leaning
forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with air bags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.

1-27

If your vehicle has an air bag for the right front
passenger, please read this:

CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual
called “Children.”

1-28

United States

Canada

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG or the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.

How the Air Bag System Works

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

1-29

CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.

1-30

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the
instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air
bags should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.

D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

1-31

D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and

diagnostic module, which records information about
the air bag system. The module records information
about the readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment. The module also records speed,
engine rpm, brake and throttle data.

D Let only qualified technicians work on your air

bag system. Improper service can mean that your
air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.

For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-32

Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle

If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?

As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.

Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?

Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.

1-33

Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

1-34

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.

1-35

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-36

CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-37

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This feature will provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder
belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seats. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Locate the guide on the side of the seatback.

1-38

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure the elastic cord is not unwrapped around the
retainer pin as this decreases the length.

1-39

Center Passenger Position

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides.

1-40

Lap Belt
If your vehicle has rear bench seats, someone can sit in
the center positions.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.

When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.

1-41

Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.

1-42

Infants and Young Children (Except Cargo
Vans with Passenger Air Bags)
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use the
vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.

CAUTION: (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

1-43

What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?

Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.

CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
outstanding protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.

For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In
addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.

1-44

CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.

CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip
bones are still so small that vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could cause serious or
fatal injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.

1-45

Infants and Young Children
(Cargo Vans with Passenger Air Bags)

1-46

CAUTION: (Continued)
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints. However, infants,
who should be restrained in a rear-facing child
restraint, cannot ride safely in this vehicle.

CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on your arms.

1-47

Restraint Systems for Children

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.

1-48

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

1-49

Q:
A:

How do child restraints work?
A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce
the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip

1-50

straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide,
shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.

Where to Put the Restraint (Except Cargo
Vans and Cab and Chassis Models)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. If your vehicle has a front passenger air
bag, never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. If your vehicle
has a right front passenger’s air bag, always
secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-51

Where to Put the Restraint (Cargo Vans
and Cab and Chassis Models)
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. If your vehicle has a passenger air bag,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here’s why:

CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always move the passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-52

Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it
should be anchored.
If your vehicle is a cargo van, the anchor for a top strap
is located at the rear of the seat cushion on the right
front passenger’s seat.

If your vehicle is a passenger van with rear seats, an
anchor bracket for a top strap is located at the rear of the
seat cushion for each three-passenger rear bench seat.
Don’t use a child restraint with a top strap in the right
front passenger’s position, or in any four-passenger rear
bench seat.

Passenger Van 3-Passenger Rear Seats
Cargo Van Models

1-53

Anchor the top strap to this bracket. For the left
outboard seating position, use anchor point (A). For the
right outboard seating position, use anchor point (B).
For a center seating position, use either anchor
point (A) or (B).
Anchor the top strap to one of these anchor points. Be
sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position

CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single bracket could cause the
anchor to come loose or even break during a
crash. A child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people and
damage to your vehicle, attach only one child
restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap
when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.

1-54

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-55

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat Position

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-56

You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the
child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-57

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position

If your vehicle has a front passenger air bag, never put a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

1-58

CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. If your vehicle is a
passenger van, always secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle is a cargo van with a right front
passenger air bag, do not use a rear-facing child
restraint in this vehicle. If a forward-facing child
restraint is suitable for your child, always move
the passenger seat as far back as it will go.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. If your vehicle has a front passenger air bag, always
move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-59

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

1-60

Older Children

Q:
A:

What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should
not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

1-61

CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.

1-62

What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?

Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.

CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-63

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

1-64

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.

Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything
is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-5
2-6
2-9
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-23
2-24
2-27
2-28
2-31
2-31

Windows
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Rear Doors
Theft
PasslockR
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn

2-32
2-32
2-33
2-33
2-34
2-34
2-40
2-42
2-44
2-47
2-47
2-48
2-50
2-52
2-54

Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
Horn
Tilt Wheel (Option)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Cigarette Lighter/Ashtray
Sun Visors
The Instrument Panel - Your
Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

2-1

Windows
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by
the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-2

Manual Windows
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower your side door windows.

Power Windows (Option)

The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger window
as well. Your power windows will work when the
ignition has been turned to RUN or ACCESSORY.
Press the rear of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window.
Press the front of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to raise the window.
The driver’s window switch also has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press and hold the side of the
window switch marked AUTO for one second to
activate the express-down mode. The express-down
mode can be cancelled at any time by pressing the
opposite side of the switch. To open the window part
way, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the
desired position.

If you have power windows, the controls are located on
each of the side doors.

2-3

Swing-Out Windows

Rear Swing-Out Window
Side Swing-Out Window
To open the side door swing-out windows, pull up on
the latch at the edge of the window. Swing the window
out and push down on the latch to lock the window
into place.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push
down on the latch to lock it.

2-4

The rear swing-out windows work the same way, but the
latch is at the bottom edge of the window.

CAUTION:

Keys
CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the rear door(s)
or rear swing-out windows open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the rear door(s) or rear
swing-out windows open or if electrical wiring or
other cable connections must pass through the
seal between the body and the rear door(s) or
rear swing-out windows:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on VENT, HEAT, or DEFOG.
Additionally, on vehicles with heating/air
conditioning systems, NORM A/C or
BI-LEVEL A/C can be used. That will
force outside air into your vehicle.
See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-5

Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.

Door Locks
CAUTION:

If you ever lose your key, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining a new one.

NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an
extra key.

2-6

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
D Passengers -- especially children -- can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
D Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
D Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with keyless entry, see
“Keyless Entry System” later in this section for
more information.
From the outside, use your key.
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the manual
lever on your door down.

Power Door Locks (Option)
Press the bottom side of the
power door lock switch to
lock all the doors at once.
Press the top side of the
power door lock switch to
unlock all the doors at once.

To unlock the door, slide the
manual lever up.

When a door is locked, the inside door handle will
not work.

2-7

Move the button to the
left to engage the security
feature. Move the button to
the right to return the door
locks to normal operation.

Rear Door Security Lock
Security locks are located on the passenger side rear
door, the side sliding door or the front portion of
the 60/40 side swing-out door.
With this feature, you can
lock these doors so they
can’t be opened from the
inside by passengers.
60/40 Swing-Out
Side Door

Move the button up to
engage the security feature.
Move the button down to
return the door locks to
normal operation.

Rear Cargo Door
Move the button down to engage the security feature.
Move the button up to return the door locks to
normal operation.

Side Sliding Door

2-8

Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

D Check the distance. You may be too far from your

vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.

D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

D Check to determine if battery replacement or
transmitter resynchronization is necessary.
See the instructions that follow.

D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.

2-9

Operation

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.

Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button.
If you press this button again within five seconds, all of
the doors will unlock. Press the REAR 2X button twice
to unlock the rear doors only. When the UNLOCK or
REAR 2X button is pressed, the interior dome lamps are
turned on for about 40 seconds or until the ignition
switch is activated. Press LOCK to lock all doors.

2-10

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
Use one PanasonicR type CR2032 battery:
1. Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the
transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove
the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery, positive (+)
side down.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter. If the
transmitter does not work after battery replacement,
it may need to be resynchronized to your vehicle.
See “resynchronization” following.

2-11

Resynchronization

Sliding Side Door (Option)

Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and simultaneously press and hold the LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at least
five seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
resynchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.

To open the sliding side door from outside, pull the
handle toward the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide the
door open.

2-12

To close the sliding side door from outside, use the
outside door handle to slide the door toward the front of
the vehicle.

To open the sliding door from inside, turn the handle
upward and toward the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide
the door toward the rear of the vehicle to open it.

When the door slides closed completely, it will be flush
with the side of the body.

2-13

60/40 Swing-Out Side Door

To close the sliding door from inside, grasp the inside
handle and slide the door toward the front of the vehicle
to a closed position.
Make sure the door is completely closed before
driving away.

2-14

To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull up on the handle and pull the handle
toward you.

To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
inside, pull the handle towards you and push open
the door.

To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and
pull it towards you.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close the rear door first.
Then close the front door. Check to make sure that both
doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door
partially, pull the check strap outward at the spring hole
and then open the door. When you close the door, the
check strap will automatically re-engage.

2-15

Rear Doors
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the rear door(s)
or rear swing-out windows open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the rear door(s) or rear
swing-out windows open or if electrical wiring or
other cable connections must pass through the
seal between the body and the rear door(s) or
rear swing-out windows:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting on
VENT, HEAT or DEFOG. Additionally, on
vehicles with heating/air conditioning
systems, NORM A/C or BI-LEVEL A/C can
be used. That will force outside air into your
vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-16

To open the rear doors from the outside, pull the handle
towards you to open the passenger’s side rear door first.

Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.

Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.

To open the driver’s side rear door, pull the latch release
at the inside edge of the door.
Both rear doors can be opened past 90 degrees by
opening the doors past the first detent (90 degrees open),
then opening fully.

When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition and transmission. Also remember to lock
the doors.

To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door
first. Then, close the passenger side rear door. Check to
make sure both doors are completely closed.

2-17

Parking at Night

PasslockR

Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.

Parking Lots
Even if you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and
take your keys. But what if you have to leave your
ignition key? What if you have to leave something
valuable in your vehicle?

D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.

D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system,
take the transmitter with you.

D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
D Then take the door key with you.

2-18

Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will
go off approximately five seconds after the key is
turned to RUN.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from START
as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.
You may also want to check the fuses (see “Fuses
and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer
for service.

New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.

Ignition Positions
Your key lets you turn the ignition switch to five
different positions.

ACCESSORY (A): This position allows you to use
things like the radio, power windows and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off. To get into
ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was
before you inserted the key.

2-19

LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.

NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if
your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.

2-20

Starting Your Gasoline Engine
If you have a diesel engine, see “Starting Your Diesel
Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.

Starting Your 8.1L V8 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.

NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0_F or -18_C), do this:

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there. When the
engine starts, let go of the key. Use the accelerator
pedal to maintain engine speed, if you have to, until
your engine has run for a while.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same
thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.

NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.

2-21

Starting Your 4.3L V6, 5.0L V8 or
5.7L V8 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.

NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, hold your key
in START for not more than 10 seconds. Then, push
the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, unless it starts sooner.

2-22

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord for the engine coolant heater is located on
the driver’s side of the engine compartment and is
attached to the hose for the power steering reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

CAUTION:

In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.

2-23

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for
that particular area.

Automatic Transmission Operation

There are several different positions for your shift lever.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, and it features an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument cluster. This display
must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of
being moved out of the PARK (P) position. This means
that if your key is in OFF, but not locked, there will be a
small current drain on your battery which could
discharge your battery over a period of time. If you have
a need to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an
extended period for any reason, it is recommended that
you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to
prevent discharging your battery.

2-24

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine because
your vehicle can’t move easily.

CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. With the ignition
in RUN, you must fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you continue pressing the brake pedal.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you want.
See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:
Shifting into REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

2-25

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:

D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.

D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the

CAUTION:

accelerator all the way down.

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

2-26

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3)
when carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills.
You should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower
gear) when towing a trailer to minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transmission.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on. If you manually select
SECOND (2), the transmission will drive in
SECOND (2). You may use this feature for reducing
torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.

Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.

NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you are stuck in very
deep sand or mud or are up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position
on a hill.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the handle, located just above the
parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE RELEASE to
release the parking brake.

2-27

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.

NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle. Always check to be sure
your parking brake is fully released before
you drive.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.

2-28

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
D Pull the lever toward you.

3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-29

Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever to PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

2-30

Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

Parking Over Things That Burn

Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in
the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then, move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.

CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.

2-31

Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-32

Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Blizzard” in the Index.

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.

Horn
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.

2-33

Tilt Wheel (Option)

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

2-34

D
D
D
D
D

Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (Option)

Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers may not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on.

2-35

Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.

For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.

2-36

For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to the
LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the
band to OFF.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. The
windshield wiper motor is protected from overload by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. Although the circuit is protected from electrical
overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause
wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using your windshield wipers.

Windshield Washer

Cruise Control (Option)

At the top of the lever, there’s a paddle with the word
PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
push the paddle.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle.
When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue
to wipe for approximately two more wipe cycles and
then either stop or return to the preset speed.

When you apply your brakes or move the cruise switch
to OFF, the cruise control shuts off.

CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where

you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.

2-37

Resuming a Set Speed

Setting Cruise Control

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal.

2-38

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
R/A (Resume/Accelerate) briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep
going faster until you release the switch or apply the
brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold
the switch at R/A.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. If the steepness
of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop more than
15 mph (24 km/h) below the set speed, your cruise control
will automatically disengage. When going downhill, you
may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your
speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out
of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.

D Push in the button at the end of the lever until you

Ending Cruise Control

D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it

there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

D To slow down in very small amounts, push the

button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

D Step lightly on the brake pedal; or
D move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

2-39

Exterior Lamps

The vehicle is also equipped with a DOME OVERRIDE
button. For more information on this feature see
“Dome Lamps” in the Index.
The delayed entry feature will allow you to enter or exit
your vehicle with the lights on for about 20 seconds,
after the door is closed or the ignition is cycled.
Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamp symbol to
turn on the following:

Your parking lamp/headlamp switch is on the driver’s
side of your instrument panel.
Your instrument panel dimmer thumbwheel has
two detent positions.
When the thumbwheel is moved to the first detent
position, the radio display and transmission selection
display will go to full intensity. The rest of the
instrument panel light will be lit dimly. Moving the
thumbwheel up one more detent will activate the
interior dome lamps.

2-40

D
D
D
D
D
D

Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Ashtray Lamp

Turn the knob clockwise again to the master lighting
symbol to turn on all the lamps listed above as well as
the headlamps.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to OFF to turn off your
lamps and lights.

You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam
by pulling on the turn signal/high beam lever.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.
Headlamps On Reminder
A tone will sound when your headlamps are turned on
and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY.
If you need to use your headlamps when the ignition
switch is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY, the tone
can be turned off by moving the thumbwheel next to the
parking lamp/headlamp switch all the way down.

Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully
functional daytime running lights are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your headlamps come
on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:

D The ignition is on,
D The headlamp switch is off, and
D The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator light
is a reminder to turn your headlamp switch on. The
other lamps that come on with your headlamps will
also come on.
When you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular
lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to
the reduced brightness of DRL.
To idle your vehicle with the engine on and the DRL off,
set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you
release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.

2-41

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

Interior Lamps
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by moving the
thumbwheel, located next to the headlamp knob, all the
way up to the second detent. In this position, the dome
lamps will remain on whether a door is open or closed.

Your vehicle’s center high-mounted stoplamp is located
above the rear doors at the center of the vehicle.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, as in a
luggage carrier, care should be taken not to block or
damage the center high-mounted stoplamp unit.

2-42

You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the headlamp knob, to set the dome lamps to
automatically come on when a door is open, or to
remain off.

Reading Lamps (Option)

If the DOME OVERRIDE button is pushed in, the dome
lamps will not come on.
If the DOME OVERRIDE button is out, your interior
lamps will work as usual.
If the button is pressed in, the interior lamps will not
come on when any of the vehicle’s doors are opened.
This feature is helpful when you want to leave your
door(s) open for an extended period of time and do not
want to run the battery down. The button is located next
to the lamp switch.
If your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button next
to the lamp to turn the lamp on or off.

2-43

Mirrors

Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors (Option)

Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror

If you have electric mirrors, they can be adjusted from
inside the vehicle.

Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce
glare from headlamps behind you after dark. Push
the tab away from you to restore the mirror to the
original position.

Outside Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of the
side of your vehicle, and have a clear view of objects
behind you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow passageways.

Select the mirror you want
to move by turning the
switch clockwise to adjust
the passenger’s side mirror
and counterclockwise to
adjust the driver’s side
mirror. The center position
is neutral.

Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer
arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted to
where you want it.

2-44

Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors (If Equipped)
Your outside mirrors can be
defrosted by pressing the
button near the fan control.

Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.

CAUTION:

An indicator light on the button will be lit anytime the
heated outside rearview mirrors are activated.

A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.

Your rear window defogger will be on anytime the
heated mirrors are on. If your vehicle has a rear window
defogger, see “Rear Window Defogger” in the Index.

2-45

Camper-Type Mirrors (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped
with the camper-type
mirrors, they can be
adjusted so you can have a
clear view of any objects
behind you.

1. To adjust the mirrors
when towing a trailer,
turn the mirror by
pushing the mirror
head toward the front
of the vehicle.

2-46

2. Turn the mirror head
so that it swings
further outboard and
adjust the mirror
surface as needed.

Storage Compartments

Cigarette Lighter/Ashtray
The front ashtray is located on the instrument panel
extension, at the center of the instrument panel.
Lift up on the ashtray door to open it.

NOTICE:
If you store paper and other things that burn in
your ashtrays, they could be set on fire by
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could
cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle.
Do not store papers and other things that burn in
your ashtrays.
Your front storage compartment is at the center of the
instrument panel extension, by the floor. To open the
compartment, press down on inside portion of the
handle and the compartment will open automatically.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Storage compartments may also be included on the
inside of each front door.

2-47

NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating can make it overload,
damaging the lighter and the heating element.
Just push the lighter all the way in and let go.
When it’s done, it will pop back by itself.
To remove the front ashtray, pull up on the tab with a
key or screwdriver inserted in the tab, and lift the
ashtray out.

2-48

Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them from side to side.

Visor Vanity Mirror (Option)
Some visors have mirrors built in, with or without
lamps. Just lift the mirror cover on each visor to turn the
lamps on, if you have them.

Accessory Power Outlet
You can plug accessory electrical equipment into an
accessory power outlet. Just pull on the outlet cover
to remove it and follow the proper installation
instructions that are included with any electrical
equipment that you install.
The accessory power outlet is located on the passenger’s
side of the front storage compartment.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels.

Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to
the power accessory outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional information on the power
accessory plugs.

NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed
25 amps. Always turn off any electrical
equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods will drain
your battery.

2-49

The Instrument Panel - Your Information System

2-50

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Lamp Controls

G. Horn

B. Air Vents

H. Convenience Tray

C. Instrument Panel Cluster

I. Cigarette Lighter

D. Comfort Controls System

J. Cupholder

E. Audio System

K. Ashtray

F. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

2-51

Instrument Panel Cluster

United States version shown, Canada similar
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.

2-52

Speedometer

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. Laws vary as to the procedure
that must be followed, so check with your state or
provincial vehicle registration office. But generally, if
the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the
old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s
set at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door
to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer
was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell
you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you
last set the trip odometer
to zero.

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
To reset the trip odometer, fully press the reset button
located near the trip odometer readout.
The trip odometer can show either total miles or trip
miles by using the push control in the cluster.

2-53

Electronic Road-Speed Governor
(Gasoline Engines) (Option)
This optional system automatically controls vehicle top
speed. The system controller receives a signal from the
vehicle speed sensor and reduces power when the
vehicle speed reaches the maximum 65 mph (105 km/h)
governed speed.

Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.

2-54

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.

Safety Belt Reminder Light

Air Bag Readiness Light

When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG or the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag sensor,
the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.

The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds,
then it will flash for
about 55 seconds.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the tone
nor the light will come on.
United States

Canada

This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and it
will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out.
This means the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.

2-55

Charging System Light

CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-56

This light should come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, before starting the
engine, as a check to show
you it is working.

After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays
on or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with your charging system. It could indicate a
problem with the generator drive belt, or some other
charging system problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it
helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.

Voltmeter
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position),
this gage shows your
battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.

When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.

You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it
means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

2-57

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
United States

Canada

This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.

2-58

CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves
into the red area your
engine is too hot!

It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
operating conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-59

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light in the United
States or Check Engine Light in Canada)
(4.3L, 5.0L & 5.7L Engines and
8.1L California Gasoline Engine)

United States

Canada

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.

2-60

This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or
CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that
there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.

NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.

NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or
the replacement of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or
CHECK ENGINE light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:

D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been

detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.

D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.

If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:

D
D
D
D

Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.

2-61

If the Light Is On Steady

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
“Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected
by the system and cause the light to turn on.

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

2-62

If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon Light) (Check Engine Light)
(8.1L Gasoline Engine -- Except California)

Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is
on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.

United States

Canada

If this light comes on or flashes while you are driving,
two things may happen.
First, you won’t notice any difference in engine
performance, but your tail pipe emissions may increase.
Second, your engine may not run properly or may stall
without warning. If either of these things happen, drive
or tow your vehicle to your dealer for service.
This light should come on when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running, as a check to show you it is
working. If it does not come on at all, have it repaired.

2-63

Oil Pressure Gage

The oil pressure gage shows
the engine oil pressure in psi
(pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).

Reduced Engine Power
The REDUCED ENGINE
POWER light will come on
when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot
and the engine further
enters the engine coolant
protection mode.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for
further information.

2-64

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low
oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.

Security Light

CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.

This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to START.

NOTICE:

The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light
flashes, the PasslockR System has entered a tamper
mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock” in
the Index.

Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.

If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
System. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your GM dealer.

2-65

Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light
You have this light on the
instrument panel. It will
light whenever the DRL are
on. It is also a reminder to
turn on your headlamps
when driving at night.

Check Gages Light
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.

If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.

2-66

The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.

Fuel Gage

Listed are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage:

D At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.

D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the

fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.

United States

Canada

D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.

The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.

D The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.

None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.

2-67

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-14
3-19

Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems
without Radio Data System
Setting the Clock for Systems
with Radio Data System
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
(If Equipped)

3-23

3-34
3-44
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-47
3-48
3-48

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with 6-Disc Compact Disc
Player with Programmable Equalization and
Radio Data System (RDS) (Option)
Theft-Deterrent Feature RDS Radios
(If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature Non-RDS Radios
(If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment (RDS Radios Only)

3-1

Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system
work for you.
With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.

Heater Controls

To decrease airflow, turn it toward LO. To turn the fan
off, turn the mode knob on the far right to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel regulates the
temperature of the air flowing into your vehicle. Turn
the knob toward the red area for warmer air. Turn the
knob toward the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob changes the heater setting.
VENT: This setting directs air through the
instrument panel vents.
BI-LEVEL: This setting divides airflow between
the heater floor vents and instrument panel vents.
HEAT: This setting directs air through the heater
floor vents.

If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, your
heater controls will look like this.
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel regulates the fan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, turn the knob toward HI.

3-2

HEAT/DEFOG: This setting divides airflow
between the heater floor vents and windshield.
DEFROST: This setting directs air through the
windshield defroster vents. This setting is used to
remove fog or ice from the windshield.

Heater/Air Conditioning Controls
(If Equipped)

Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel regulates the fan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, turn the knob toward HI.
To decrease airflow, turn it toward LO. To turn the fan
off, turn the mode knob on the far right to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
compartment of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to
adjust the air temperature independently of the function knob
setting. Turn the knob toward the red area for warmer air.
Turn the knob toward the blue area for cooler air.

If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heater/air
conditioning controls will look like this.
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning, open the
windows to clear the vehicle of hot air.

Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel changes the
heater/air conditioning setting.
MAX A/C: Turn the right knob to MAX A/C for
maximum cooling. This setting puts the system in the
recirculation mode and helps to maximize your air
conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel
economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest. After
the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortable temperature,
turn the knob clockwise to place the air conditioning
system in the A/C mode.

3-3

A/C: This setting is used for normal cooling on hot
days. It cools outside air and directs it through the
instrument panel outlets.
BI-LEVEL A/C: This setting divides airflow
between the heater floor vents and instrument panel
vents. The air conditioning compressor will cycle
continuously in this setting as long as the outside air
temperature is warm enough to activate the compressor.

Rear Heater (Without Air Conditioning)
(If Equipped)
If you have a rear heater (without rear air conditioning),
the control is located on the instrument panel.

VENT: This setting directs air through the
instrument panel vents.
HEAT: This setting directs air through the heater
floor vents. It is useful for cold weather.
HEAT/DEFOG: This setting divides airflow
between the heater floor vents and the windshield. In the
blended position, the air conditioning compressor is
automatically activated to dehumidify the air.
DEFROST: This setting directs air through the
windshield defroster vents. It is useful when you have
fog or ice on the windshield.

To increase and decrease the flow of heated air to the
rear floor vents, turn the thumbwheel marked REAR
HEAT to the speed you want.
The thumbwheel has three speed positions. To increase
the flow of heated air, turn the thumbwheel toward
HIGH. To turn the fan off, turn the control to OFF.

3-4

Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater
(If Equipped)

To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the right side of the control panel.

If your vehicle has a rear air conditioning and rear
heater system combination, controls are provided
to regulate the temperature, location and speed of
the airflow.

For warmer air, turn the knob toward the red area, and
for cooler air, turn the knob toward the blue area.
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the center knob
on the control panel. Turn the knob counterclockwise
for floor vent airflow or clockwise for headliner vent air
flow. Generally, the upper vents are used for air
conditioning and the floor vents for heating. The control
knob can be set to any blend setting.
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan knob on the left
side of the control panel to the desired fan speed.
To activate the rear control, turn the fan knob on the
front control to REAR CNTL.

Front Passenger Control

3-5

Air Conditioning
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning, open the
windows to clear the vehicle of hot air. This reduces the
time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep
your windows closed for the air conditioner to work at
its best.
You can use MAX A/C with the temperature knob in the
blue area when it’s really hot outside and you need to
cool the inside air quickly. MAX A/C lets in only a little
air from the outside.

Rear Passenger Control

If you first use MAX A/C, you can then use A/C with
the temperature knob in the blue area, as soon as the
vehicle has cooled down, so outside air will be going
through your vehicle.

The rear control works just like the front control. It will
allow second seat passengers to adjust the controls if the
front control is switched to the rear position.

If your vehicle has rear air conditioning, setting it on
LO may enhance front A/C performance by allowing
trapped refrigerant in rear lines to circulate.
When the air conditioning is on, you may notice a slight
increase or decrease in engine speed, due to compressor
operation. This is normal because the system is
designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep
the desired temperature.

3-6

Heating
On cold days, use HEAT with the temperature knob in
the red area. Outside air will be brought in through the
floor outlets. The heater works best if you keep your
windows closed while using it.
If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting your engine, your heating system will produce
warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.

To turn on the rear window
defogger, press this button
located near the fan control.
An indicator light in the
button will come on when
the rear window defogger
is working.

Defrosting
Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the
windshield quickly in extremely cold conditions. The
temperature knob should be in the red area and the fan
knob toward high. The air conditioning compressor may
operate in this setting to dehumidify the air.

Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
If you see lines running across the rear windows, you
have a rear window defogger. The lines warm the glass.
For best results, clear the windows of as much snow or
ice as possible before using the rear window defogger.

The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
The rear window defogger will turn itself off after
several minutes. If you need additional warming time,
press the button again. Pressing the button when the
indicator light is illuminated will turn the defogger off.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated outside rearview
mirrors, the rear window defogger button will activate
both the rear window defogger and the heated outside
rearview mirrors. See “Heated Outside Rearview
Mirrors” in the Index.

3-7

Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear windows. Use care
not to damage the wiring bands that connect the rear
window defogger grid when operating the rear
swing-out windows (if equipped).

NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Air will flow through the
instrument panel vents.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is
moving. With the side windows closed, air will flow into
the front air inlet grilles at the base of the windshield,
through the vehicle and out the rear air exhaust valve.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or
the air conditioning fan is running.

3-8

Your vehicle has air vents near the center and on the
sides of the instrument panel that allow you to adjust the
direction and the amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the dial on the vent up or down to direct airflow
to your preference. Increase or reduce the amount of
airflow by opening and closing the louvers. The vents
turn to direct the airflow from side to side.

When you close a vent, it will increase the flow of air
coming out of any vents that are open.
If you have rear heating or rear air conditioning, you
will have adjustable vents in the rear of the vehicle to
help direct the airflow. The rear air conditioning vents
are located in the headliner at the rear of the vehicle.
The rear heating vents are located next to the second
and third seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near
the floor. You can move the vents to direct the flow of
air, or close the vents altogether. When you close a vent,
it will increase the flow of air coming out of any vents
that are open.

Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the

blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.

D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.

Your vehicle has air vents in the center and on the sides
of your instrument panel.
You can move the vents from side to side or up and
down to direct the flow of air, or close the vents
altogether. When you close a vent, it will increase the
flow of air coming out of any vents that are open.

3-9

Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Setting the Clock for Systems without Radio
Data System
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
Then press the HR (down) arrow until the correct hour
appears. Press and hold the MIN (up) arrow until the
correct minute appears. The clock may be set with the
ignition on or off.

Setting the Clock for Systems with Radio
Data System
Press and hold the HR or MIN buttons, located below
the tune knob, for two seconds. Then press and hold HR
until the correct hour appears. AM or PM will appear on
the display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears. The clock may be set with the ignition on or
off. The clock symbol will appear on the display in
time-set mode.
To set the clock to the time of an FM station
broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS) information,
press and hold HR and MIN at the same time for two
seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbol appear
on the display. If the time is not available from the
station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display instead.
RDS clock time is broadcast once a minute. Once you
have tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes before pressing and holding the HR MIN
buttons will result in an update to the clock time.

3-10

AM-FM Stereo

TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there. The radio will seek to stations
with a strong signal only.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for
two seconds until you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen
to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a
station, stop for a few seconds and flash the station
frequency, then go on to the next station. Press one of
the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. The radio will
scan to stations with a strong signal only.

Playing the Radio
PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RCL: Press this knob to recall the station being played
or to display the clock. Clock display is available with
the vehicle off.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.

PRESET SCAN: Use PRESET SCAN to listen to each
of your preset stations for a few seconds. Press and hold
one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds
until you hear two beeps. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, except those
stations with weak reception, stop for a few seconds and
flash the station frequency, then go on to the next preset
station. PRESET SCAN will only scan the six presets
that are in the band selected. Press one of the SEEK
arrows again to stop scanning presets. The channel
number (P1-P6) will appear momentarily just before the
frequency is displayed.

3-11

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press and release AUDIO repeatedly until BAS
appears on the display. Then press and hold the up arrow
to increase bass. “B” and a positive number will appear
on the display. Press and hold the down arrow to decrease
bass. B and a negative number will appear on the display.
B and a zero will appear on the display when the bass
level is set to the middle position. Release the up or down
arrow when you find the bass level you want or when the
maximum or minimum level is reached.

3-12

TREBLE: Press and release AUDIO until TRE appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up arrow to
increase treble. “T” and a positive number will appear
on the display. Press and hold the down arrow to
decrease treble. T and a negative number will appear on
the display. T and a zero will appear on the display when
the treble level is set to the middle position. Release the
up or down arrow when you find the treble level you
want or when the maximum or minimum level is
reached. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
To set BASS or TREBLE to the middle position, select
the desired tone control. Then press and hold AUDIO
for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and
a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display. To set
all of the tone controls and speaker controls to the
middle position, end out of audio mode. Then press and
hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. CEN will appear on the display.

Adjusting the Speakers
BALANCE: Press and release AUDIO until BAL
appears on the display. Then press and hold the up arrow
to move the sound to the right speakers or the down
arrow to move the sound to the left speakers. “R” and a
number will appear on the display when the sound is
balanced toward the right speakers. “L” and a number
will appear on the display when the sound is balanced
toward the left speakers. L and a zero will appear on the
display when the the sound is balanced between the
speakers. Release the up or down arrow when you find
the speaker balance you want or when the maximum or
minimum level is reached.
FADE: Press and release AUDIO until FAD appears on
the display. Then press and hold the up arrow to move
the sound to the front speakers or the down arrow to
move the sound to the rear speakers. “F” and a number
will appear on the display when the sound is balanced
toward the front speakers. “R” and a number will appear
on the display when the sound is balanced toward the
rear speakers. F and a zero will appear on the display
when the the sound is balanced between the speakers.
Release the up or down arrow when you find the speaker
balance you want or when the maximum or minimum
level is reached.

To set BALANCE or FADE to the middle position,
select the desired speaker control. Then press and hold
AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. L and a zero or F and a zero will appear on the
display. To set all of the tone controls and speaker
controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode.
Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Radio Calibration
Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle
from the factory. If CAL appears on the display it means
that your radio has not been configured properly for
your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership
for service.
LOC: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. Your vehicle
must be returned to the dealership for service.

3-13

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)

TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there. The radio will seek to stations
with a strong signal only.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two
seconds until you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to
stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station,
stop for a few seconds and flash the station frequency,
then go on to the next station. Press one of the SEEK
arrows again to stop scanning. The radio will scan to
stations with a strong signal only.

Playing the Radio
PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RCL: Press this knob to recall the station being
played, to recall if the tape player is active, or to display
the clock.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.

3-14

PRESET SCAN: Use PRESET SCAN to listen to each
of your preset stations for a few seconds. Press and hold
one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds
until you hear two beeps. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, except
stations with weak reception, stop for a few seconds and
flash the station frequency, then go on to the next preset
station. PRESET SCAN will only scan the six presets
that are in the band selected. Press one of the SEEK
arrows again to stop scanning presets. The channel
number (P1-P6) will appear momentarily just before the
frequency is displayed.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press and release AUDIO until BAS appears on
the display. Then press and hold the up arrow to increase
bass. “B” and a positive number will appear on the
display. Press and hold the down arrow to decrease bass.
B and a negative number will appear on the display.
B and a zero will appear on the display when the bass
level is set to the middle position. Release the up or
down arrow when you find the bass level you want or
when the maximum or minimum level is reached.

3-15

3-16

To set BALANCE or FADE to the middle position,
select the desired speaker control. Then press and hold
AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. L and a zero or F and a zero will appear on the
display. To set all of the tone controls and speaker
controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode.
Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this
player. The longer side with the tape visible should face
to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the
tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If you hear
nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in
squarely. Press the eject button to remove the tape and
start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FAD, BAL,
TRE, BAS and SEEK controls just as you do for
the radio. The radio will display UP if the top side of
the tape is playing. DN will appear if the bottom side
is playing.

If the player detects a tight or broken tape, ERR (error)
will appear on the display and the player will eject the
tape. The radio will go back to playing the last
station selected.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off, first
press the eject button or the RCL knob.
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous selection on the tape if the selection
has been playing for less than 3 seconds. If the PREV
button or the left SEEK arrow is pressed and the current
selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, it
will go to the beginning of the current selection. If the
PREV button or the left SEEK arrow is pressed and the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending on the
position on the tape. PRE will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in PREV mode. Your tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between
each selection for PREV to work. The sound will mute
while seeking.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next selection on the tape. NXT will appear on
the display while the cassette player is in NEXT mode.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for NEXT to work. The sound
will mute while seeking.
REV (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
REV will appear on the display. Press it again to return
to playing the tape. The radio will play the last selected
station while the tape reverses. You may select stations
during REV operation by using TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or
PRESET SCAN.
FWD (4): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. FWD will appear on the display.
Press the button again to return to playing the tape.
The radio will play the last selected station while the
tape advances. You may select stations during FWD
operation by using TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or
PRESET SCAN.
SIDE (5): Press this button to play the other side
of the tape.

3-17

RPT (6): Press this button once to hear a selection over
again. RPT will appear on the display. The current
selection will continue to repeat. RPT will flash on the
display while the cassette player is searching for the
start of the selection. Your tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for RPT
to work. Press this button again to turn off repeated play.
OFF will appear on the display.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a tape is in the player. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.
TAPE: With a cassette tape in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play a cassette tape. CAS
will appear on the display. Press AM FM to return to the
radio when a cassette tape is playing. The inactive tape
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
In order to use a portable CD player adapter or a cassette
tape head cleaner you must disable the TIGHT/LOOSE
TAPE sensor. Press and hold the TAPE button for two
seconds with the radio off and the vehicle on. CAS will
flash on the display showing the TIGHT/LOOSE TAPE
sensor has been disabled. The feature will remain
disabled until the tape is ejected.

3-18

: Press this button to remove a tape. The radio will
play. Eject may be activated with the radio off. Cassette
tapes may be loaded with the radio and vehicle off if this
button is pressed first.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold the eject button for five
seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio display
will flash --- to show the indicator was reset.
Radio Calibration
Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle
from the factory. If CAL appears on the display it means
that your radio has not been configured properly for
your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership
for service.
LOC: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. Your vehicle
must be returned to the dealership for service.

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
(If Equipped)

Playing the Radio
PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RCL: Press this knob to recall the station being played
or to display the clock. Pressing RCL while playing a
CD will also display the CD track number or elapsed
time of CD track.

Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there. The radio will seek to stations
with a strong signal only.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for
two seconds until you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen
to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a
station, stop for a few seconds and flash the station
frequency, then go on to the next station. Press one of
the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. The radio will
scan to stations with a strong signal only.
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for more than four seconds until you will hear a
double beep. Use PRESET SCAN to listen to each of
your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go
to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
except those stations with weak reception, stop for a few
seconds and flash the station frequency, then go on to
the next preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows
again to stop scanning presets. The channel number
(P1-P6) will appear momentarily just before the
frequency is displayed.

3-19

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press and release AUDIO until BAS appears on
the display. Then press and hold the up arrow to increase
bass. “B” and a positive number will appear on the
display. Press and hold the down arrow to decrease bass.
B and a negative number will appear on the display.
B and a zero will appear on the display when the bass
level is set to the middle position. Release the up or
down arrow when you find the bass level you want or
when the maximum or minimum level is reached.

3-20

TREBLE: Press and release AUDIO until TRE appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up arrow to
increase treble. “T” and a positive number will appear
on the display. Press and hold the down arrow to
decrease treble. T and a negative number will appear on
the display. T and a zero will appear on the display when
the treble level is set to the middle position. Release the
up or down arrow when you find the treble level you
want or when the maximum or minimum level is
reached. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
To set BASS or TREBLE to the middle position, first
select the desired tone control. Then press and hold
AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. B and a zero or T and a zero will appear on the
display. To set all of the tone controls and speaker
controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode.
Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.

To set BALANCE or FADE to the middle position, first
select the desired speaker control. Then press and hold
AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. L and a zero or F and a zero will appear on the
display. To set all of the tone controls and speaker
controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode.
Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.
The display will show CD. If you want to insert a
compact disc with the ignition off, first press RCL or
the eject button.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and Err (error) may appear on the
display. When the road becomes smooth or the
temperature returns to normal, the disc should play.
If the disc comes out, it could be that:
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.

3-21

PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
or the left SEEK arrow is pressed and the current
selection has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current selection. The
track number will appear on the display. If you hold the
button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving back through the disc. The sound will
mute while seeking.
NEXT (2): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next track. The track number will appear on
the display. If you hold the button or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
REV (3): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
within a track. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time while reversing.
FWD (4): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
within a track. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time while forwarding.

3-22

RDM (5): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RND will show on the
display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
OFF will appear on the display.
RPT (6): Press this button once to hear a selection over
again. RPT will appear on the display. The current track
will continue to repeat. Press RPT button again to turn
off repeated play. OFF will appear on the display.
RCL: Press this button to see the current track number
or how long the current track has been playing.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a disc is in the player. The disc will stop but remain in
the player.
CD: With a compact disc in the player and the
radio playing, press this button to play a compact disc.
CD will appear on the display. Press AM FM to
return to the radio when a compact disc is playing.
The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio will
play. Eject may be activated with either the ignition or
radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition
off if this button is pressed first.

Radio Calibration
Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle
from the factory. If CAL appears on the display it means
that your radio has not been configured properly for
your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership
for service.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control
(If Equipped)

LOC: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. Your vehicle
must be returned to the dealership for service.

Playing the Radio
PWR: Press this button to turn the system on and off.
VOL: Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
DISP: Press this button to display the clock with the
ignition off. Press this button to display an RDS station
frequency or program type when the radio is on.

3-23

AUTO VOL: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Press AUTO VOL to adjust the SCV.
AVOL will appear on the display. Each time you press
AUTO VOL, another volume setting (LOW, MEDIUM
or HIGH) will appear on the display. NONE will appear
on the display if the radio cannot find out the vehicle
speed. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
particular speed. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use
SCV, select OFF. Each volume setting allows for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there. The radio will seek to stations
with a strong signal only.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
radio will beep once to confirm. Whenever you press
that numbered button, the station you set will return
and the AUTO TONE equalization that you selected
will also be automatically selected for that button.

TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Finding a Station

3-24

P SCAN: Press and hold one of the arrows for more
than two seconds. The radio will beep once to confirm.
Use P SCAN to listen to each of your favorite stations
stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds. The radio
will scan through each of the stations stored on your
pushbuttons, except those stations with weak reception.
The AUTO TONE setting stored for that pushbutton will
be automatically chosen. Press P SCAN or one of the
pushbuttons again to stop scanning. SCAN will be
displayed whenever the tuner is in the P SCAN mode.
The channel number (P1-P6) will appear with the
frequency. In FM mode, this function will scan through
the current band such as FM1 or FM2.

Setting the Tone
BASS: Press and release the P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO
knob until BASS appears on the display. Then turn the
knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to
decrease bass. The display will show the bass level.
When you use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE
setting will switch to manual. To set bass to the middle
position, select the control and press and hold the
P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to the middle position.
To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold the P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO
knob when no tone or speaker control is active. The
radio will produce one beep and display ALL with the
level display in the middle position.

3-25

TREBLE: Press and release the P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO
knob until TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to
decrease treble. The display will show the treble level.
When you use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE
setting will switch to manual. If a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. To set treble
to the middle position, select the control and press and
hold the P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO knob. The radio will
produce one beep and set the display level to the middle
position. To set all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press and hold the P-TYPE
LIST/AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is
active. The radio will produce one beep and display
ALL with the level display in the middle position.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
ROCK, NEWS, POP, JAZZ, CLASSICAL and
COUNTRY music. TONE and the preset equalization
setting will appear on the display when you press AUTO
TONE. Each time you press it, another setting will
appear on the display. The manual setting allows tone
control to return to the BASS and TREB controls. Use
PUSHBUTTONS and AUTO TONE button to program
AUTO TONE for station presets.

3-26

Adjusting the Speakers
BALANCE: Press and release the P-TYPE
LIST/AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display.
Turn the knob clockwise to move the sound to the right
speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound to the
left speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers. The display will show the speaker
balance. To set the balance to the middle position,
select the control and press and hold the P-TYPE
LIST/AUDIO button. The radio will produce one beep
and set the display level to the middle position. To set all
tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press
and hold the P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is active. The radio will produce one
beep and display ALL with the level display in the
middle position.

FADE: Press and release the P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO
knob until FADE appears on the display. Turn the knob
clockwise to move the sound to the front speakers and
counterclockwise to move the sound to the rear
speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers. The display will show the speaker
balance. To set the fade to the middle position, select the
control and press and hold the P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO
button. The radio will produce one beep and set the
display level to the middle position. To set all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position, press and hold
the P-TYPE LIST/AUDIO knob when no tone or
speaker control is active. The radio will produce one
beep and display ALL with the level display in the
middle position.
Using RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS is a system that sends data along
with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned
to. You can use RDS to display program information
and to control your radio. With RDS, the radio can:

D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,

D seek to stations with traffic announcements,

D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies and

D receive and display messages from radio stations.
RDS is always on. RDS features are only available for
use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information.
The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving
specific RDS information from these stations. These
features will only work when the RDS information is
available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast
incorrect information that will cause the radio features
to work improperly. If this happens, please contact the
radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name
will appear on the display, instead of the frequency.
Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time
of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current
programming. Some stations also provide the name of
the current program.
DISP: Press this knob to change what appears on the
display while using RDS. The display options are station
name, station frequency, PTY and the name of the
program (if available). Press and hold the display knob
to set the default display of the RDS station from the
displays available.

3-27

Accessing RDS Stations:
1. Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE
LIST/AUDIO knob to display the program type list.
2. Turn knob either clockwise or counterclockwise to
select a program type. The list is alphabetical. If you
select ANY TYPE your radio will seek to the first
PTY available.
3. Push SEEK TYPE button to activate search.
TRAF: Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station that does. The TRAF icon will flash on the
display. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAF will appear on the display.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can be
programmed to interrupt the playback of a cassette tape,
CD or FM radio by enabling the traffic interrupt feature.
Press the TRAF button once to seek to an RDS station
that supports the traffic interrupt feature if the current
tuned station does not. The TRAF icon will flash on the
display when seeking for a station that supports traffic
interrupt. When the traffic interrupt feature is on, TRAF
will appear on the display.

3-28

When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
cassette tape or compact disc is playing. The TRAF icon
and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the
traffic announcement plays. If the cassette tape or
compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact
disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point
where it stopped.
VOL: Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume
when RDS interrupts regular play. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
INFO: If the current station has a message, INFO will
appear on the display. These text messages are from the
RDS broadcaster to the listening public and may be
general information such as artist and song title, call in
phone numbers, etc. Press this button to see the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed. To scroll
through the message at your own speed press the INFO
button again for less than one second. A new group of
words will appear on the display. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received. The
old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to.

P-TYPE LIST: Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to select the Program Type (PTY) you
want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display. Press the SEEK TYPE button and the radio will
seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the selected
P-TYPE. If the radio cannot find the desired P-TYPE,
NONE will appear on the display and the radio will
return to the last station you were listening to.
SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with
the last selected PTY. TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display, if it is not already showing.
Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek. If a station
with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will return
to the original station and display NONE.
If both SEEK TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will
search for stations with traffic announcements and the
selected PTY.
ALERT!: This type of announcement warns of national
or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off alert
announcements. ALERT! appears on the display when an
alert announcement plays. When an alert announcement
comes on the tuned radio station, you will hear it, even if
the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is
playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is
playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.

This function will only work during actual emergency
broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not
supported by all RDS stations.
ALTERNATE FREQUENCY: This RDS feature
allows the radio to switch frequencies to the best quality
station with the same programming. AF is off by default
from the factory. Press and hold AM-FM for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on or off. AF ON or
AF OFF will appear on the display and the radio will
beep once. The radio will not switch to other stations
when AF is off.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this
player. The longer side with the tape visible should face
to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the
tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A tape
symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the
tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove the
tape and start over.

3-29

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
TREB, BASS and SEEK controls just as you do for the
radio. The display will show TAPE and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off, first
press EJT or DISP.
If CHK TAPE appears on the radio display, the tape
won’t play because of an error.
CHK TAPE may be displayed when the tape is tight and
the player can’t turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape.
Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn
the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the
tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
CHK TAPE may be displayed when the tape is broken.
Try a new tape.
CHK TAPE may be displayed when the tape is wrapped
around the tape head. Attempt to get the cassette out.
Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.

3-30

PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous selection on the tape if the selection
has been playing for less than 3 seconds. If the PREV
button or the left SEEK arrow is pressed and the current
selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, it
will go to the beginning of the current selection. If the
PREV button or the left SEEK arrow is pressed and the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending on the
position on the tape. SEEK and a “-1” will appear on the
display while the cassette player is in PREV mode. If
PREV or the left SEEK arrow is pressed additional
times or held, the radio will go to displayed number of
previous selections up to “9”. SEEK and a negative
number will appear on the display. Your tape must have
at least three seconds of silence between each selection
for PREV to work. The sound will mute while seeking.
NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next selection
on the tape. If you press the button more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the tape.
SEEK and a positive number will appear on the display.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for NEXT to work. To forward
through each selection press the right SEEK arrow. The
sound will mute while seeking.

REV (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last selected station while the tape reverses. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
You may select stations during REV operation by using
TUNE, SEEK and P SCAN controls.

SEEK: SEEK and a right pointing arrow is the same as
NEXT, and a left pointing arrow and SEEK is the same
as PREV. If the button is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward or
backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive or
negative number will appear on the display.

FWD (4): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected
station while the tape advances. The station frequency
and FWD will appear on the display. You may select
stations during FWD operation by using TUNE, SEEK
and P SCAN controls.

AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a tape is in the player. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.

SIDE (5): Press this button to play the other side of
the tape. TAPE and an up or down arrow will appear on
the display.

(6): Press this button to reduce background noise.
NR ON will appear on the display. Press it again to turn
Dolby off. NR OFF will appear on the display.

TAPE CD: With a tape in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play a tape. Press AM FM
to return to the radio when a tape is playing. Press TAPE
CD to switch between the tape and compact disc if both
are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
: Press this button located next to the cassette slot to
remove a tape. The radio will play. EJT may be
activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

3-31

CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold the cassette eject button for
five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator. The radio
display will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
Tight/Loose Tape Sensor Defeat
With the radio off and the ignition on, press and hold the
TAPE CD button to disable the tight/loose tape sensing
feature to enable play of some tape head cleaners and
portable CD adapters. The radio will display READY
and flash the cassette icon. The tight/loose tape sensing
feature will then be disabled until the next cassette eject.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want to
insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
DISP or EJT.

3-32

If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and CHECK CD may appear on
the display. When the road becomes smooth or the
temperature returns to normal, the disc should play.
If the disc comes out, it could be that:

D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
or the left SEEK arrow is pressed and the current
selection has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current selection.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold the button or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving back through the
disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next track. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If you hold the button or the right
SEEK arrow, or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the disc. The sound
will mute while seeking.

RDM (6): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM ON will show on the
display. RDM T and the track number will appear on
the display when each track starts to play. Press RDM
again to turn off random play. RDM OFF will appear on
the display.

REV (3): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
within a track. Press and hold this button for less than
two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to
reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release it
to play the passage. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.

SEEK: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current or previous track. Press the right arrow to go to
the start of the next track. If either of the buttons is
held or pressed more then once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.

FWD (4): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
within a track. Press and hold this button for less than
two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to
advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release it
to play the passage. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.
CD (5): With a compact disc in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play a compact disc. Press
AM FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is
playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.

DISP: Press this button to see how long the current
track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time will
appear on the display. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
button until you see the display you want, then hold
the button for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when
a disc is in the player. The disc will stop but remain in
the player.

3-33

TAPE CD: With a CD in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play a CD. Press AM FM to
return to the radio when a CD is playing. Press TAPE
CD to switch between the tape and compact disc if both
are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.

AM-FM Stereo with 6-Disc Compact Disc
Player with Programmable Equalization
and Radio Data System (RDS) (Option)

: Press this button located below the CD slot to
remove the disc. The radio will play. EJT may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may
be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is
pressed first.
CAL ERR: This message is displayed when the radio
has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle. You
must return to the dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.

3-34

Playing the Radio
VOLUME-PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

AUTO VOL: Your system has a feature called
automatic volume. With this feature, your audio system
adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind
noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level.
Press this button to select MIN, MED or MAX. Each
choice allows for more volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume
automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to
overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use automatic volume, select OFF.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:

Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold the SEEK button for two seconds
until SC appears on the display and you hear a beep.
Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The
radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then
go on to the next station. Press the SEEK button again
to stop scanning. If you press SEEK for more than
four seconds, the radio will change to PRESET SCAN
mode. The sound will mute while scanning.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return and the
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.

1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best
suits the type of station selected.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold the SEEK button for
more than four seconds, PRESET SCAN will appear on
the display. You will hear a double beep and the P will
blink with the preset number. Use PRESET SCAN to
listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press the SEEK button again to stop
scanning presets.

3-35

Setting the Tone
BASS: Press the AUDIO knob until BASS appears on
the display. Turn the knob to increase or decrease bass.
When you use this control, the radio’s tone setting will
switch to custom.

TREB: Press the AUDIO button until TREB appears on
the display. Turn the knob to increase or decrease treble.
When you use this control, the radio’s tone setting will
switch to custom. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.

To set the bass to the middle position, select BASS and
press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to zero. To set all tone
and speaker controls to the middle position, press and
hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control
is active. The radio will produce one beep and
CENTERED will appear on the display.

To set treble to the middle position, select TREB and
press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to zero. To set all tone
and speaker controls to the middle position, press and
hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control
is active. The radio will produce one beep and
CENTERED will appear on the display.

MID: Press the AUDIO knob until MID appears on the
display. Turn the knob to increase or decrease mid.
When you use this control, the radio’s tone setting will
switch to custom.

AUTO EQ: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass, mid and treble equalization settings designed for
country, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical stations. The
last setting will appear on the display when you first
press AUTO EQ. Each time you press AUTO EQ,
another setting will appear on the display. Press AUTO
EQ again after TALK appears and CUSTOM will
appear. Tone control will return to the BASS, MID and
TREB. Also, if you alter BASS, MID, or TREB while in
an auto EQ setting, the radio will return to CUSTOM.
CUSTOM will appear on the display.

To set the mid to the middle position, select MID and
press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and set the display level to zero. To set all tone
and speaker controls to the middle position, press and
hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control
is active. The radio will produce one beep and
CENTERED will appear on the display.

3-36

Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new
features. With RDS, the radio can:

D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,

D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies, and

D receive and display messages from radio stations.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations
which broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of
your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information
from these stations. These features will only work when
the RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio
station may broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, please contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name will appear on the display, instead of the
frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station
name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for
their current programming.

TRAF: Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. The traffic announcement brackets will
appear on the display. TRAF will appear on the display
if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. If
the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, the radio will seek to a station that
does. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NONE FOUND will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station or a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is
playing. If the compact disc player was being used, the
compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at
the point where it stopped.
INFO: If the current station has a message, INFO will
appear on the display. Press this button to see the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed. To see the parts
of the message faster than every three seconds, press this
button again. A new group of words will appear on the
display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
INFO will disappear from the display until another new
message is received.

3-37

P-TYPE: This button is used to turn on and off
Program Type (PTY) select. PTY and the light next to
the button will turn on. The last selected PTY will
appear on the display for five seconds. Turn the P-TYPE
knob to select the PTY you want to listen to. Press
SEEK or SCAN to find radio stations of the PTY you
want to listen to. The last PTY selected will be used for
seek or scan modes. If a station with the selected PTY is
not found, NONE FOUND will appear on the display.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will
search for stations with traffic announcements and the
selected PTY.
To use the P-TYPE interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you
want to interrupt on. When you are listening to a
compact disc, the last selected RDS FM station will
interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. You can set up
to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
1. Press P-TYPE, if it is not already on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2.

3-38

3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until
you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT!: This type of announcement warns of national
or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off
alert announcements. ALERT! appears on the display
when an alert announcement plays. When an alert
announcement comes on the tuned radio station, you
will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a compact
disc is playing. If the compact disc player is playing,
play will stop for the announcement and resume when
the announcement is finished.
ALTERNATE FREQUENCY: This feature allows the
radio to switch to a stronger station with the same
program type. Press and hold AM FM for two seconds
to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the
display. The radio may switch to stronger stations. Press
and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate
frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the display. The
radio will not switch to other stations. When you turn
the ignition off and then on again, the alternate
frequency feature will automatically be turned on.

Adjusting the Speakers

Playing a Compact Disc

BAL-FADE: The AUDIO knob adjusts balance and
fade. To adjust balance, press the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to adjust the
sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers. To adjust fade,
press and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the
front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the
sound between the speakers.

LOAD: This compact disc player will accommodate up
to six discs.

To set the balance and fade to the middle position, select
balance or fade and press and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will beep once and will set the display level to
the middle position. To set all tone and speaker controls
to the middle position, press and hold the AUDIO knob
when tone or speaker controls are not active. The radio
will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on
the display.

4. Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.

To insert one disc do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.

When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your disc,
it will be activated each time you play a disc.
5. If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to
play automatically.

3-39

To insert multiple discs do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will then hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load a
disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
you can then load another disc. The disc player takes
up to six discs. Do not try to load more than six.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a
CD symbol for each disc will be displayed. If you
select an EQ setting for your disc, it will be activated
each time you play a disc.
4. If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will
begin to play automatically.
5. To load more than one disc but less than six,
complete steps 1, 2 and 3. When you have finished
loading discs, with the radio on or off, press LOAD
to cancel the loading function. The radio will begin
to play the last CD loaded.

3-40

As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If CHECK CD appears on the radio display, it could
be that:

D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.

D The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer when reporting the problem.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD: For every CD loaded, a
number will appear on the radio display. To play a
specific CD, first press the CD AUX button to start
playing a CD. Then press the numbered button that
corresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar
will appear under the CD number that is playing, and the
track number will appear.

: This button will eject a disc or discs. Do the
following to eject:

D Press and release the eject button to eject the disc
that is currently playing, or

REV: Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show
elapsed time.

D to remove all of the discs, press this button for two

FWD: Press and hold this button to advance quickly
within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show
elapsed time.

When the eject button is pressed, the receiver will eject
the disc and REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can
either remove the disc or if the disc is not removed, after
25 seconds, the disc will be automatically pulled back
into the receiver. If you try to push the disc back into the
receiver manually, before the 25 second time period is
complete, the receiver will sense an error and will try to
eject the disc several times before stopping. You will be
able to remove the disc at this time. Pressing the
receiver’s VOLUME-PWR knob, off and then on,
will allow the receiver to clear its disc sensing feature.
You may now be able to use the LOAD and eject
features normally. Do not, at any time, press the eject
button more than once, the receiver’s 25 second eject
timer will reset at each press of eject, which will cause
the receiver to not eject a disc, until the 25 second time
period has elapsed.

RPT: With repeat, you can repeat one track or an entire
disc. To use repeat, do the following:

seconds, you will hear a beep, and the light will flash
to let you know when a disc is being ejected.

D To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn it off.

D To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and hold
the RPT button for two seconds. Press RPT again to
turn if off.

3-41

RDM: With random, you can listen to the tracks in
random, rather than sequential order, on all of the discs
or on one disc. To use random, do the following:

D Press and release the RDM button to play the tracks
on all of the discs that are loaded, in random order.
RDM will appear in the display. Press RDM to turn
it off.

D To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order, press and hold RDM for more than
two seconds. You will hear a beep and RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn
if off.

AUTO EQ: Press AUTO EQ to select the desired preset
equalization setting while playing a compact disc. The
equalization will be automatically set whenever you
play a compact disc.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go to
the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track. If you press the button more than once, the
player will continue moving backward or forward
through the disc.

3-42

SCAN: Press and hold the SEEK button for more than
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you
hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to each track for a few
seconds. The sound will mute while scanning. SCAN
will appear on the display. Press this button, again, to
stop scanning.
DISC SCAN: Press and hold the SEEK button for more
than four seconds until DISC SCAN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. Use DISC SCAN to listen
to the first track, for ten seconds of each disc loaded.
The sound will mute while scanning to the next track.
DISC SCAN will appear on the display. Press the
SEEK button, again, to stop scanning.
RCL: Press this button to see how long the current track
has been playing. To change what is normally shown on
the display (track or elapsed time), press the button until
you see the display you want, then hold the button until
the display flashes.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player.

Using Song List Mode
The integrated 6-disc CD changer has a feature
called song list. This feature is capable of saving
20 track selections.
To save tracks into SONG LIST:

To play the SONG LIST:
Press SONG LIST. One beep will be heard and
S-LIST will appear on the display.
The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order
that they were saved.

1. The disc player must be on with at least one disc
loaded. See “LOAD/EJECT” previously for
more information.

You may seek through the song list by using the
SEEK arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.

2. The disc changer must not be in song list mode.
S-LIST should not appear on the display. If S-LIST
is present, press SONG LIST to turn it off.

To delete tracks from SONG LIST:

3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK right arrow
button to locate the track that you want to save.
The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold SONG LIST for two or more seconds
to save the track into memory. When SONG LIST is
pressed a beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of pressing SONG LIST continuously,
two beeps will sound, to confirm that the track has
been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

1. The disc player must be turned on.
2. Press SONG LIST to turn song list on. S-LIST will
appear on the display.
3. SEEK to the desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST buttons for
two seconds. When pressing SONG LIST one beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds of
pressing the SONG LIST button continuously,
two beeps will be heard, to confirm that the track
has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the tracks will be added to the end of the list.

3-43

To delete the entire SONG LIST:
1. The disc player must be on.
2. Press SONG LIST to turn song list on. S-LIST will
appear on the display.
3. Press and hold SONG LIST for more than four
seconds. A beep will be heard, followed by two
beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be
heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song list
has been deleted.
If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list.
To end SONG LIST mode, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be
removed from the display.

Theft-Deterrent Feature RDS Radios
(If Equipped)
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning a
portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not
operate and LOCKED will be displayed.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed.
With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen.

Theft-Deterrent Feature Non-RDS
Radios (If Equipped)
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning a
portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not
operate and LOC will be displayed.
With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen.

3-44

Understanding Radio Reception

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably

The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

and clearly.

NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.

3-45

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.

The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To
prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the
following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.

3-46

When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.

Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-47

Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.

3-48

Chime Level Adjustment
(RDS Radios Only)
The radio is one of the vehicle chime producers. The
chime is produced from the driver’s side front door
speakers. To change the volume level, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The chime volume level will change from the
normal level to loud, and LOUD will be displayed on
the radio. To change back to the default or normal
setting, press and hold the pushbutton 6 again. The
chime level will change from the loud level to normal,
and NORMAL will be displayed. Each time the chime
volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Chime level
adjustment is only available on RDS radios. Removing
the radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or
chime module will alter vehicle chimes.

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-16

Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

4-19
4-20
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-25
4-29
4-30
4-32

City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer

4-1

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.

Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.

4-2

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone
call, reading, or reaching for something on the
floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull
off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.

Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:

D
D
D
D

Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:

D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking

D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

4-3

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.

4-4

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or
if you’re with a group, designate a driver who
will not drink.

4-5

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.

Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.

4-6

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s
what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.

4-8

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.

Steering

Using Anti-Lock

Steering Tips

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but
this is normal.

Driving on Curves

Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.

Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor
you can control.

4-9

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-10

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.

Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-11

Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:

D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.

If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

4-12

D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass

while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.

D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,

start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.

D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.

D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and

start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)

D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.

D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.

Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.

D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the

following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

4-13

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Driving at Night

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.

4-14

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.

D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to

slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.

D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night.

But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night.
They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but
they also make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t
lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed
headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.

4-15

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.

4-16

CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

4-17

Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

4-18

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

City Driving

CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be
carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and the other vehicle occupants
could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs,
and otherwise be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.

D Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See “Tires” in the Index.

4-19

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

D Know the best way to get to where you are

Freeway Driving

going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.

D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”

D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic

light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that
have not cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

4-20

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.

4-21

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked

Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.

D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:

D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?

D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

4-22

all levels?

recommended pressure?

D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook

along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?

D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway Hypnosis

Hill and Mountain Roads

Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road,
the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against
the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less
than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:

D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.

D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.

or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.

4-23

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.

CAUTION:

D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going down
a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine
running and your vehicle in gear when you
go downhill.

levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

D Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
D

D
D

4-24

to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.

4-25

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.

4-26

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.

D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine

until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:

D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-27

D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.

D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-28

CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps
the battery (or batteries) charged. You will need a
well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the vehicle,
and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps.
Let the heater run for a while.
If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run it at a
higher speed to get enough heat. Then, shut the engine
off and close the window almost all the way to preserve
the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only
when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But
do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you
can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

NOTICE:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground will damage drivetrain components.

4-29

Loading Your Vehicle

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on
your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.

CAUTION:
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your
original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel
and cargo.

4-30

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.

Trailering Package

CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.

Payload
The Payload Capacity is shown on the Certification/Tire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the
people inside as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the
factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things
from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.

If your vehicle is equipped with the trailering package,
there is also a load rating which includes the weight of
the vehicle and the trailer it tows. This rating is called
the Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).
When you weigh your trailer, be sure to include the
weight of everything you put in it. And, remember to
figure the weight of the people inside the vehicle as part
of your load.
Your dealer can help you determine your GCWR.

4-31

Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a
limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle.
Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install
the new equipment.

Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.

4-32

NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle. Additional rear axle maintenance is
required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:

D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.

D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will

weigh 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg). You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.

D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.

D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.

D You should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a

lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will
minimize heat buildup and extend the life of
your transmission.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

4-33

Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your
vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh, based upon vehicle model and options.
Model
Engine
Axle Ratio
Max. Trailer Weight (lbs.) (kg)
G1500 (Cargo)
4.3L
3.42
4,600 (2088)
5.0L
3.42
5,600 (2542)
5.7L
3.42
6,100 (2769)
G1500 (Passenger)
4.3L
3.42
4,200 (1907)
3.73
4,700 (2134)
5.0L
3.42
5,100 (2315)
5.7L
3.42
5,600 (2542)
3.73
6,600 (2996)
G2500 (Cargo)

4.3L
5.0L
5.7L

6.5L

4-34

3.42
4.10
3.42
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10

4,300 (1952)
5,000 (1816)
5,200 (2361)
5,700 (2588)
6,400 (2906)
7,900 (3587)
8,500 (3859)
8,500 (3859)

Model
G2500 (Passenger)

Engine
5.7L
6.5L

G3500 (Cargo)

5.7L
6.5L
8.1L

G3500 (Passenger)

5.7L
6.5L
8.1L

Axle Ratio
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
4.10

Max. Trailer Weight (lbs.) (kg)
5,800 (2633)
7,300 (3314)
8,100 (3677)
8,100 (3677)
6,300 (2860)
7,800 (3541)
8,400 (3814)
8,400 (3814)
7,500 (3405)
9,000 (4086)
10,000 (4540)
5,600 (2542)
7,100 (3223)
7,800 (3541)
7,800 (3541)
6,800 (3087)
8,300 (3768)
10,000 (4540)

4-35

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the towing vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional equipment, passengers and cargo in the
towing vehicle must be subtracted from the above
maximum trailer weights.

Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or
gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will
be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer,
you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading

4-36

If you’re using your platform hitch as a weight-carrying
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using your
platform hitch as a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t
go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the
weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:

D The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for

D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will

weigh more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.

D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?

If you’re using the wiring provided by the
factory-installed hitch, you should not need to make
any holes in the body of your vehicle. However, if
you have an aftermarket hitch installed, you may
need to make holes in the body.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index. Dirt and water can, too.

hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper. Do not use a ball hitch, because it could pull
the bumper loose.

4-37

Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and
your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack
so you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.

4-38

Your trailer brake system can tap into your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system, except:

D Don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if the trailer’s

brake system will use more than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc)
of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder. If it does,
both braking systems won’t work well. You could even
lose your brakes.

D Will the trailer parts take 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of

pressure? If not, the trailer brake system must not be
used with your vehicle.

D If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends
fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing
for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use double-walled steel tubing.

Driving with a Trailer

CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into your vehicle. You can’t
see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness
or death. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
D Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
D Keep the rear-most windows closed.
D If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
MAX A/C because it only recirculates the
air inside your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.

Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.

4-39

Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.

4-40

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included in
the optional trailering package).
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked (preferably on level ground) with the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutes before turning
the engine off. If you do get the overheat warning, see
“Engine Overheating” in the Index.

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:

D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

4-41

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and brake
system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review these sections before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

Trailer Wiring Harness
The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring package is a
seven-wire harness assembly. The four-wire portion of
the harness assembly is stored under the vehicle, along
the driver’s side rear corner of the frame rail. The
three-wire portion of the harness assembly is stored in a
frame pocket under the rear of the vehicle, on the
driver’s side. The heavy-duty trailer wiring harness has
a 30-amp feed wire. Both harnesses come without
connectors and should be wired by a qualified electrical
technician. The technician can use the following color
code chart when connecting the wiring harness to
your trailer.

4-42

Four-Wire Harness

D
D
D
D

Light Green: Back-up lamps
Brown: Parking lamps
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal

Three-Wire Harness

D Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes
(seven-wire harness only)
D Orange: Trailer accessory (seven-wire harness only)
D White (heavy gage): Ground wire
Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or
strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it
loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but
not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the
harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together
and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.

Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-9
5-9

Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engine)

5-12
5-19
5-19
5-20
5-35

Cooling System (Gasoline Engine)
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-1

Hazard Warning Flashers

Push the button located at
the top of the steering
column all the way down to
make your front and rear
turn signals flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, push the button until the
first click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

5-2

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
The hazard warning flashers will not flash if the brakes
are applied.

Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please follow the steps below to do it safely.

CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things can hurt you.

NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or
jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks
clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when
there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

5-3

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
If you have a diesel engine vehicle with two batteries
(or more) you should know before you begin that,
especially in cold weather, you may not be able to
get enough power from a single battery in another
vehicle to start your diesel engine.
If your vehicle has more than one battery, use the
battery that is under the hood of the vehicle. This
will reduce the electrical resistance.

5-4

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) and a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all
lamps that aren’t needed, and radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries, and could save
your radio.

NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.

CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the batteries have enough water. You
don’t need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
(or batteries) installed in every new GM vehicle.
But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to
take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

5-5

CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will
go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or a body metal surface.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts, too. And don’t connect the negative (-)
to negative (-).

5-6

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Or use
a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step.

9. Make your last connection away from the battery, to
the engine block, frame or other heavy, unpainted
metal parts of your vehicle. A ground location has
been provided through a stud attached to the
body surface.

5-7

10. Remove the cap on the ground location
before using.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.

5-8

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:

Towing Your Vehicle

1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
heavy, unpainted metal engine part on the vehicle
that had the dead battery.

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” and “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in
the Index.

2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from
the negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the
good battery.

Engine Overheating
(Gasoline Engine)

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.

You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. If you have a diesel engine,
you will also find a low coolant light on your
instrument panel.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.

5-9

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.

NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.

5-10

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:

D
D
D
D

Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it’s on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).

5-11

Cooling System (Gasoline Engine)
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the FULL COLD mark.

A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.

5-12

If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.

CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.

NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.

5-13

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank

NOTICE:

If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOLR engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.

See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index
for more information on location.

CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.

5-14

CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system
can blow out and burn you badly. They are under
pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure
cap -- even a little -- they can come out at high speed.
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if
you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.

5-15

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.

5-16

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See
“Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information
about the proper coolant mixture.

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-17

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.

5-18

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

Engine Fan Noise

If a Tire Goes Flat

Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you
may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and
should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or
making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling is not required and the clutch
partially disengages.

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:

You may also hear this fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
partially disengages.

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-19

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.

CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.

5-20

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

Unless your vehicle has a flat rear tire, do not remove
or restore a tire from/to a storage position under the
vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack. Always
tighten the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle
when restoring.
If you have a vehicle which was completed from a cab
and chassis, refer to the information from the body
supplier/installer.
The spare tire is a full-size tire, like the other tires on
your vehicle.

Your spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your
vehicle. You will use the ratchet and extension to lower
the spare tire.
A flat rear tire reduces clearance to remove the spare
tire. If there is less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) between
the ground and the rear bumper or any trailer hitch, jack
up the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground.
(See “Removing the Flat Tire” and “Installing the
Spare Tire,” in the Index.

For cargo vans, and all
passenger vans except those
with the 15-passenger
seating arrangement, the
jack is secured in the rear
passenger side corner of
the vehicle.

Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it off the
mounting bracket. Set the jack and jacking equipment
near the flat tire.

5-21

The ratchet has a DOWN side and an UP side.

For vans with the 15-passenger seating arrangement,
the jack is secured on the rear passenger side floor of
the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it out of the
mounting bracket. Set the jack and jacking equipment
near the flat tire.

5-22

Attach the ratchet, with the DOWN side facing you, to
the extension. The extension has a socket end and a flat
chisel end.
Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through the
hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper. Be sure
the flat end connects into the hoist shaft.

Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the spare tire
to the ground. If you are changing a flat rear tire and the
vehicle is already jacked up, use the jack handle and
extension to hook the cable. Then pull the spare from
beneath the vehicle. If the retainer pulls out, hook the
inside of the wheel and pull the spare tire out from under
the vehicle.

NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive the
vehicle before the cable is restored.

When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening.

5-23

Jacking Tool Storage
A. Socket
B. Jack Handle
C. Ratchet
D. Jacking Tool Storage Box
E. Jack Handle Extension

5-24

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), jack
handle extension (B), jack handle (C), socket (D) and
the ratchet (E).

Removing the Wheel Covers and Locking
Wheel Nuts

2. Loosen the plastic nut caps.
1. You will need to take off the wheel nut caps to reach
your wheel nuts. When using the ratchet and socket,
make sure the DOWN side faces you.

5-25

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire

3. Remove the center cap.
1. With the DOWN side facing you, use the ratchet and
socket to loosen all the wheel nuts. Don’t remove
them yet.

5-26

2. The jack has a bolt on the end. Attach the socket end
of the extension to the jack bolt.

Front Position

Attach the ratchet to the extension with the UP side
facing you.
3. Turn the ratchet clockwise. That will raise the jack
lift head a little.

5-27

4. Position jack
under the vehicle
as shown.

CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

CAUTION:
Rear Position
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.

5-28

6. Remove all the wheel
nuts, and take off the
flat tire.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the vehicle
far enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to fit.

7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.

5-29

CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.

CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.

5-30

8. Put the wheel nuts back
on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

10. Tighten the
nuts firmly in
a crisscross
sequence as
shown. Turn
the wheel
wrench clockwise.

NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
11. Put the wheel cover back on, or put the center cap
and plastic wheel nut caps back on. Remove any
wheel blocks.

CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
140 lb-ft (190 N·m).

Remember that the jack, jacking equipment and tire
must be properly stored in their original storage
position before you begin driving again. The next
part will show you how.

5-31

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.

5-32

3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle,
keeping the cable tight.

4. Attach the ratchet, with the UP side facing you, to
the extension.

5-33

5. Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through
the hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet/wheel wrench
until the tire is secure and the cable is tight. The
spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and
then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
You will hear two “clicks” when the tire is up all
the way.
Return the jacking equipment to the proper location.
Secure the items and replace the jack cover.

5-34

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow

NOTICE:

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out
after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you
do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.

5-35

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-7
6-8
6-11
6-12
6-16
6-18
6-22
6-22
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-32

Service
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuels in Foreign Countries (Gasoline Engines)
Filling Your Tank (Gasoline Engine)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Noise Control System
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines)
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear Axle
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery

6-33
6-40
6-41
6-50
6-51
6-54
6-56
6-56
6-56
6-57
6-58
6-59
6-60
6-66
6-67
6-70

Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped)
Cleaning Tires
Sheet Metal Damage
Finish Damage
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-1

Service

Doing Your Own Service Work

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does, see
“Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the
Index before attempting to do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-2

CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.

Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the Diesel Engine
Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please
read this.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher.
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for
better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasolines.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.

6-3

In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the fuel pump.

Canada Only
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get
rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.

6-4

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control
system performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.

NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
(Gasoline Engines)
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.

Filling Your Tank (Gasoline Engine)
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.

6-5

If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Filling Your
Tank (Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
The fuel cap is behind a
hinged door on the driver’s
side of your vehicle.

To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if
you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back
to the right.

CAUTION:

While refueling your
vehicle, hang the cap by the
tether from the hook on the
filler door.

6-6

If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the
right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

6-7

Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
engine fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-8

Hood Release
To open the hood, first pull
this handle inside the
vehicle. It is located in front
of the driver’s side door
frame near the floor.

Lift the hood, release the
hood prop from its retainer
and put the hood prop into
the slot in the hood hinge.
The underhood lamp
(if equipped) will
automatically come on
and stay on until the hood
is closed.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.

6-9

Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:

A. Battery
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Oil Dipstick

6-10

D. Engine Oil Fill
E. Transmission Dipstick
F. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

G. Power Steering Reservoir
H. Brake Master Cylinder
I. Windshield Washer Fluid

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly.

Tampering With Noise Control
System Prohibited

Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer. Then let the hood down
and close it firmly.

Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof:

Noise Control System
The following information relates to compliance with
federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noise emission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The
noise control system warranty is given in your
warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.

1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person,
other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device or element of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of
noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
Insulation:

D Removal of the noise shields or any
underhood insulation.

6-11

Engine:

D Removal or rendering engine speed governor

(if equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine speed
to exceed manufacturer specifications.

Fan and Drive:

D Removal of fan clutch (if equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.

D Removal of the fan shroud (if equipped).
Air Intake:

D Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
D Reversing the air cleaner cover.

Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil
(Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.

Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick has
a yellow handle and is
located near the center of
the engine compartment.

Exhaust:

D Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
D Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust
pipe clamps.

See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.

6-12

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.

NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.

The engine oil filler cap
is located between the
coolant recovery tank and
the engine air cleaner/filter.
See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index
for more information
on location.

When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.

6-13

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-14

As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is best for
your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s
going to be 0_F (-18_C) or above. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.

Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil

NOTICE:

If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:

Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.

D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).

GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.

This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.

D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
D Most trips are through dusty areas.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.

D The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.

6-15

If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.

What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.

6-16

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Gasoline Engines)
The engine air cleaner/filter
assembly has an indicator
that lets you know when the
air filter is dirty and needs
to be serviced. See “Owner
Checks and Services” in the
Index to determine when to
check the indicator.

If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is
green, no air filter service is required. When the area
inside the indicator is orange and CHANGE AIR
FILTER appears, the filter should be replaced.

To change the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:
1. Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover.
2. Lift the filter out of the engine air cleaner/filter
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little
dirt as possible.
3. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.
4. Install the new engine air cleaner/filter into the
engine air cleaner/filter housing. Make sure that it
fits properly into the housing.
5. Install the cover and fasten the retaining clips.

The engine air cleaner/filter is located near the center
of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.

6. After the engine air cleaner/filter is properly
serviced, the indicator should be reset. Push the
button on the top of the indicator to reset it to the
green (clean) filter zone.
See “Normal Replacement Parts” for the proper filter
to use.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the engine air cleaner/filter and crankcase
ventilation filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”
in the Index.

6-17

CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Automatic
Transmission Fluid” in the Diesel Supplement.

When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:

D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600 and you do not
use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

6-18

How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult,
you may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.

NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which
is 180_F to 200_F (82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50_F (10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), drive
the vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at
idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50_F
(10_C) or more. If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will
give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
D At high speed for quite a while.
D In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
D While pulling a trailer.

6-19

Checking the Fluid Level

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

Prepare your vehicle as follows:

D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.

D With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).

D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift

lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).

D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

1. The transmission dipstick has a red handle and is
located near the center of the engine compartment.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index
for more information on location. Flip the handle up
and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.

6-20

Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a
reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of
the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for
a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRONR-III is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.

D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as

How to Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.

6-21

Rear Axle

Engine Coolant

When to Check and Change Lubricant

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.

What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

6-22

The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:

D
D
D
D
D

Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.

What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.

6-23

NOTICE:

Checking Coolant

If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.

6-24

The coolant recovery tank is located near the center of the
engine compartment. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine
is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL COLD, or
a little higher.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.

CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see “Cooling System” in the Index.

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.

6-25

Radiator Pressure Cap

Power Steering Fluid

The radiator pressure
cap is located near
the center of the
engine compartment.

NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a pressure-type cap and
must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss
and possible engine damage from overheating.
Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the
overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

6-26

The power steering fluid reservoir is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

Windshield Washer Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

What to Use

How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
To prevent contamination of brake fluid, never check or
fill the power steering reservoir with the brake master
cylinder cover off.

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid
reservoir is located on the
driver’s side of the engine
compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in
the Index for more
information on location.

What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.

6-27

NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.

Brakes
Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up.

6-28

The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake
system. If it is, you should have your brake system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes
won’t work well, or won’t work at all.

Checking Brake Fluid

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in
this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.

6-29

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.

NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

6-30

brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.

Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When
you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7
of this manual under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

6-31

Brake Adjustment

Battery

Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.

Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for battery location.

If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.

Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake
parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.

6-32

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
If you have a diesel engine, you have two batteries. The
primary battery is located on the passenger’s side of the
engine compartment. The second battery is located on
the driver’s side framerail.

Vehicle Storage

Bulb Replacement

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your GM dealer service department.

CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.

Before replacing any bulbs, make sure all lamps are off
and the vehicle is not running. See “Replacement Bulbs”
in the Index.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps
You have either a sealed beam headlamp or a
composite system.

6-33

Sealed Beam Headlamp

Composite Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Locate the rear side of each of the headlamps.

1. Remove the four screws from the headlamp retainer.
Pull the retainer out and set it aside.
2. Unplug the lamp assembly from the connector.
3. Remove the old headlamp
4. Install a new headlamp into the assembly.
5. Plug the assembly back into the connector.
6. Reassemble the headlamp assembly with the retainer.

6-34

3. Without removing the headlamp assembly itself,
remove the bulb socket from the back of the headlamp
on the driver’s side. Turn the bulb counterclockwise
one quarter turn to remove it from the socket.
4. On the passenger’s side, turn the bulb clockwise one
quarter turn. Also, to remove the bulb on the
passenger’s side, you will need to move the battery.
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb.

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
To replace the front parking/turn signal lamps:

5. Reinstall the new bulb into the socket and return it to
the headlamp assembly.
1. Remove the outer screws from the parking/turn
signal lamp lens assembly. (There are either two or
four screws, depending on your vehicle’s trim level.)

6-35

Sidemarker Lamps

2. Remove the lamp from the grille.
3. Squeeze the tab on the side of the bulb assembly
while turning it counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb assembly from the back of the lens
and replace the bulb.
5. Turn the socket clockwise to reinstall it in the lens
assembly. Reinstall the screws on the parking/turn
signal lamp assembly.

6-36

1. Remove the screw from the top of the lens.

Taillamps
1. Open the rear door.

2. Unclip the bottom of the lamp from the grille.
3. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it.
Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse these steps to reinstall the lamp.

2. Push the socket protector until you can see
the fasteners.

6-37

3. Remove the nuts with a deep socket wrench.

6-38

4. Remove the hidden upper nuts.

5. Lift the lamp as you
turn it toward the rear
of the vehicle.

6. Squeeze the tab on the side of the sockets while
turning them counterclockwise.

6-39

Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Index for more information.

7. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
Install the new bulb.
8. Reverse the above steps to reinstall the lamp.

Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To remove the type with a
release clip, do the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a
vertical position.

6-40

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.
3. The insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the notched end
last, into the end with two blade claws. Then slide
the insert all the way through the blade claws at the
opposite end.
5. Make sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slot.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull it up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.

Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your GM Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.

6-41

Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)

6-42

NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, use the ratchet to tighten the cable. See “Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index. If your
vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see “Dual Tire
Operation” later in this section.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.

If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always use one of
the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.

6-43

CAUTION:

If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, always use one of
the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent holes in
the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certification/Tire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.

6-44

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.

When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.

Dual Tire Operation
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel
Nut Torque” in the Index.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically.
If you’re going to be doing a lot of driving on
high-crown roads, you can reduce tire wear by adding
5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressure in the outer tires.
Be sure to return to the recommended pressures when no
longer driving under those conditions. See “Changing a
Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.

CAUTION:
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is
badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch
fire. You or others could be injured. Be sure all
tires (including the spare) are properly inflated.

6-45

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by
an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

6-46

CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.

CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

6-47

Temperature -- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.

6-48

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of
your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make
you lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured. Always
use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.

NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.

Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque”
in the Index.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

6-49

Tire Chains

NOTICE:
Use tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use chains that are the proper size
for your tires. Install them on the tires of the
rear axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or
spinning the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.

Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

6-50

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

D
D
D
D

Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach

Here are some cleaning tips:

D
D
D
D

Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.

Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if
stains are stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

6-51

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

Cleaning Vinyl

Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.

D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain

2. If a stain remains, follow the Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner instructions described earlier.

D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.

if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.

Cleaning Leather

4. Let dry.

D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
dealer for this product.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive

2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.

D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned

3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.

6-52

cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel

Cleaning Glass Surfaces

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.

Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.

Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when
running, wax, sap or other material may be on the
blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching glass
cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it
with water.

6-53

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.

Washing Your Vehicle

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index. Don’t
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that
contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be
flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface,
or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be required. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

6-54

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Your vehicle may have a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes
that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

Finish Care

NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.

6-55

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.

Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

6-56

Finish Damage

Chemical Paint Spotting

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by
General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment
not made or sold by General Motors are not covered.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.

6-57

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427

SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)

1052918**

8 oz. (0.237 L)

DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner

t Protectant

Armor All

Multi-Purpose
Interior Cleaner
1052929
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wheel Cleaner
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
12345721
2.5 sq. ft.
Synthetic Chamois
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
12377964*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377966*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
12377984*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1052925

6-58

16 oz. (0.473 L)

USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the front passenger door frame.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

D
D
D
D

your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.

6-59

Electrical System

Headlamp Wiring

Add-On Electrical Equipment

The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to flicker on and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.

NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

6-60

Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical
overload, overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause
wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access door
is on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel above the
hood release lever.
You can remove the
cover by turning the
fastener counterclockwise.

Be sure to use the correct fuse. If you ever have a
problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you
can borrow one of the same fuse rating. Just pick
some feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use
its fuse, if it is of the same fuse rating you need.
Replace it as soon as you can.

You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse
extractor is mounted to the fuse block access door.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.

6-61

POSITION

6-62

NAME

CIRCUITS PROTECTED

STOP

CHMSL, Stoplamps

HTD MIR

Electric Heated Mirrors

CTSY

Courtesy Lamps, Dome/RDG Lamps, Vanity Mirrors, Power Mirrors

GAUGES

IP Cluster, DRL Relay, DRL Module, HDLP Switch, Keyless Entry
Illumination, Low Coolant Module, CHIME Module, DRAB Module

HAZARD

Hazard Lamps/CHIME Module

CRUISE

Cruise Control

PWR AUX

Auxiliary Power Outlet, DLC

CRANK

Not Used

PARK LPS

License Plate Lamp, Parking Lamps, Taillamps, Front Sidemarkers,
Glove Box Ashtray

10.

AIR BAGS

Air Bags

11.

WIPER

Wiper Motor, Washer Pump

12.

HTR-A/C

A/C, A/C Blower, High Blower Relay, HTD Mirror

13.

CIG LTR

Cigarette Lighter

14.

ILLUM

IP Cluster, HVAC Controls, RR HVAC Controls, IP Switches, Radio
Illumination, Door Switch Illumination

POSITION

NAME

CIRCUITS PROTECTED

15.

DRL

DRL Relay

16.

TURN B/U

Front Turn, RR Turn, Back-up Lamps, BTSI Solenoid

17.

RADIO-1

Radio (Ign, Accy), Upfitter Provision Relay

18.

BRAKE

4WAL PCM, ABS, Cruise Control

19.

RADIO-B

Radio (Battery), Power Antenna

20.

TRANS

PRNDL, Automatic Transmission

21.

SECURITY

Passlock

22.

RR DEFOG

Rear Window Defog

23.

NOT USED

Not Used

24.

RR HVAC

RR HVAC Controls, HIGH, MED, LOW Relays

PWR ACCY

Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power Seat, Keyless Entry
Illumination Module

PWR WDO

Power Windows

6-63

Engine Compartment Fuse Relay Center
The fuse block is on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment at the rear.

NAME
SPARE
A.I.R.
BLOWER
ABS
IGN B
IGN A
BATT
LIGHTING
RH-HDLP
LH-HDLP
RH-HIBM
LH-HIBM

6-64

CIRCUITS PROTECTED
Spare Fuse
Air Pump
Front Blower Motor
Electronic Brake Control Module
Ignition Switch
Starter Relay, Ignition Switch
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Instrument Panel Fuse Block,
Headlamp Switch
Right-hand Headlamp
(Export only)
Left-hand Headlamp
(Export only)
Right-hand High-beam Headlamp
(Export only)
Left-hand High-beam Headlamp
(Export only)

NAME
ETC
RR BLOWER
FUEL SOL
ENG-I

ECM-I

IGN-E
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

CIRCUITS PROTECTED
Electronic Throttle Control
Rear Auxiliary Blower
Motor Relays
Fuel Solenoid
Heated O2 Sensors, Mass Air
Flow Sensor, Evap Canister Purge
Valve, Crankshaft Position Sensor,
Secondary Air Injection Relay
(Diesel), Water in Fuel Sensor
(Diesel), Fuel Heater (Diesel),
Glowplug Relay (Diesel),
Wastegate Solenoid (Diesel)
Ignition Coil, Camshaft Position
Sensor, VCM, Fuel Injectors,
Coil Driver
Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse

NAME
A/C
HORN
ECM-B

SPARE
SPARE
AUX A
AUX B
A/C RELAY
HORN RELAY
A.I.R. RELAY
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
STARTER
RELAY
ABS EXPORT
RELAY

CIRCUITS PROTECTED
Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
Horn Relay, Underhood Lamp(s)
Fuel Pump Relay, VCM, PCM,
Fuel Pump and Engine Oil
Pressure Switch
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Upfitter Provisions
Upfitter Provisions
Air Conditioning
Horn
Air
Fuel Pump
Starter
ABS Export

6-65

Replacement Bulbs
LAMP OR BULB

QTY

NUMBER

Sealed Beam Headlamps
Composite
Low-Beam Headlamps

2
2

H6054
6052

Composite High-Beam
Headlamps
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Front Parking and
Turn Lamp
Rear Parking Lamp
Rear Stop and Turn Lamp

6-66

9005

2
4

194
2357NA

2
2

3057
3057

LAMP OR BULB
Back-up Lamp

QTY
2

NUMBER
3156

1156

Back-up Lamp
Rear Parking, Stop, and
Turn Lamp
CHMSL
License Plate Lamp
Underhood Lamp
Reel Lamp
Reading Lamps

1157

2
1
1
1
6

921
194
232
232

Sunshade Vanity Mirror

211-2
74

Capacities and Specifications
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in
this manual.
See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.

Engine Identification -- Gasoline Engines
Engine
Type
VIN Code
Fuel System
Spark
Plug Gap
Firing Order
1Central

“VORTEC” 4300
V6
W
CSFI1
0.060 inches
(1.52 mm)

“VORTEC” 5000
V8
M
CSFI1
0.060 inches
(1.52 mm)

“VORTEC” 5700
V8
R
CSFI1
0.060 inches
(1.52 mm)

“VORTEC” 8100
V8
G
MFI2
0.060 inches
(1.52 mm)

1-6-5-4-3-2

1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2

1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3

Sequential Fuel Injection

2Sequential

Fuel Injection

6-67

Wheel Nut Torque
MODEL

TORQUE

All

140 lb-ft (190 N·m)

Cooling System Capacity
ENGINE
“VORTEC” 4300 V6
“VORTEC” 5000 V8
“VORTEC” 5700 V8
“VORTEC” 8100 V8

VIN
W
M
R
G

QTY Without Rear Heater
11.0 quarts (10.4 L)
17.0 quarts (16.0 L)
17.0 quarts (16.0 L)
23.0 quarts (21.8 L)

QTY With Rear Heater
14.0 quarts (13.2 L)
20.0 quarts (18.9 L)
20.0 quarts (18.9 L)
26.0 quarts (24.6 L)

After refill, the level MUST be checked as outlined under “Engine Cooling System” in Section 5.

6-68

Crankcase Capacity
ENGINE
“VORTEC” 4300 V6
“VORTEC” 5000 V8
“VORTEC” 5700 V8
“VORTEC” 8100 V8

VIN
W
M
R
G

Quantity With Filter
4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
5.0 quarts (4.8 L)
5.0 quarts (4.8 L)
6.5 quarts (6.15 L)

After refill, the level MUST be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range. Variation in oil filter size and oil cooler drainback can cause different fill levels. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Fuel Tank Capacity
TYPE
Standard Tank
Standard Tank
Optional Tank*

QUANTITY
31.0 U.S. gallons (117.3 L)
35.0 U.S. gallons (132.5 L)
55.0 U.S. gallons (208.1 L)

MODEL TYPE
Passenger and Cargo
Cab and Chassis
Cab and Chassis

*159 inch wheelbase or 177 inch wheelbase

6-69

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer’s publications.
Engine
VIN
Oil Filter
Air Cleaner Filter *
PCV Valve
Spark Plugs
Fuel Filter
Radiator Cap

“VORTEC” 4300
V6
W
PF47
A917C
CV769C

“VORTEC” 5000
V8
M
PF1218
A917C
CV769C

“VORTEC” 5700
V8
R
PF1218
A917C
CV769C

“VORTEC”8100
V8
G
PF454
A917C
**

41-932
GF481
RC36

TJ14R-P15
GF481
RC36

* Replace with ACDelcoR Air Filter, Part No. A917C and for severe dusty conditions,
use ACDelcoR Air Filter, Part No. 1236C.
**8100 V8 has an internal PCV which does not require replacement.

6-70

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-9
7-33

Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-48
7-53
7-55
7-58

Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record

7-1

Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.

7-2

Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.

How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.

CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you
to record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.

If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3

Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.

7-4

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle
uses these. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:

D carry passengers and cargo within recommended

limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.

D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:

Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if
any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:

D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.

D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
D Most trips are through dusty areas.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.

D If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.

One of the reasons you should follow this schedule
if you operate your vehicle under any of these
conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to
break down sooner.

Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and
Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs
first). Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Diesel Engine Only:
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in
dusty conditions. Gasoline Engine Only: Noise
Shields Inspection (GVWR above 10,000 lbs. only).
Diesel Engine Only: Shields and Underhood
Insulation Inspection. Diesel Engine Only:
Thermostatically Controlled Engine Cooling Fan
Check (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Diesel Engine Only: Air Intake System Inspection.
Front Wheel Bearing Repack (or at each brake
relining, whichever occurs first).

7-5

Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 24,000 Miles (40 000 km): Diesel Engine Only:
Fuel Cap Replacement, if driving in dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Diesel Engine
Only: Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Fuel Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR
or driven under severe conditions or equipped with
diesel engine).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. If Equipped: Exhaust Gas
Recirculation System Inspection. Gasoline Engine
Only: Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Diesel Engine Only: Crankcase Depression Regulator
Valve (CDRV) System Check.

7-6

Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Gasoline Engine
Only: Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Gasoline Engine
Only: Spark Plug Replacement. Gasoline Engine
Only: Automatic Transmission Service (normal
conditions). Gasoline Engine Only: Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.

Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.

Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Gasoline Engine
Only: Noise Shields Inspection (GVWR above
10,000 lbs. only). Diesel Engine Only: Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection. Diesel Engine
Only: Thermostatically Controlled Engine
Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Diesel Engine Only: Air Intake
System Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Diesel Engine Only: Engine Air
Cleaner Filter Replacement. Front Wheel
Bearing Repack (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).

7-7

Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR
or driven under severe conditions or equipped with
diesel engine).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. If Equipped: Exhaust Gas
Recirculation System Inspection. Gasoline Engine
Only: Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Diesel Engine Only: Crankcase Depression Regulator
Valve (CDRV) System Check.

7-8

Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Gasoline Engine
Only: Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Gasoline Engine
Only: Spark Plug Replacement. Gasoline Engine
Only: Automatic Transmission Service (normal
conditions). Gasoline Engine Only: Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.

# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage and rear driveline center splines.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of
this schedule.
** Drive axle service. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use:

D Check fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving
D
D

in dusty areas or when towing a trailer, drain fluid
and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
If your vehicle has a locking differential, drain fluid
and refill at first engine oil change.
More frequent lubrication may be required for
heavy-duty use.

7-9

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

9,000 Miles (15 000 km)

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

(Continued)

7-11

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) (Continued)
Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 lbs. or Equipped with Diesel Engine
Only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling
fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.

j
j
j
j

7-12

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

21,000 Miles (35 000 km)

7-13

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Diesel Engine Only: Replace fuel filler cap if driving in dusty conditions.

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

An Emission Control Service.

27,000 Miles (45 000 km)

7-14

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
j Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
j Replace fuel filter.

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Diesel Engine Only: Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.
Gasoline Engine Only: See “Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator
Check” in the Index.
j Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 lbs. or Equipped with Diesel Engine
Only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.

7-15

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling
fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.

j
j
j

33,000 Miles (55 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-17

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

whichever occurs first).
Diesel Engine Only: Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
Gasoline Engine Only: See “Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator
Check” in the Index.

7-18

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

j Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 lbs. or Equipped with Diesel Engine
j
j

Only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling
fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.

7-19

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

An Emission Control Service.

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle has a diesel

engine, if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).

7-20

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

57,000 Miles (95 000 km)

7-21

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
j Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
j Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 lbs. or Equipped with Diesel Engine

Only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j If Equipped: Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system inspection as
described in the service manual.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)

j
j

7-22

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

j Gasoline Engine Only: Conduct evaporative control system inspection. Check
j

j
j

all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition.
Check that the purge valve works properly (if equipped). Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
Diesel Engine Only: Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Gasoline Engine Only: See “Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator
Check” in the Index.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan,
inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: Check the crankcase depression regulator valve system
for any worn, plugged or collapsed hoses. See service manual.
An Emission Control Service.

7-23

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

69,000 Miles (115 000 km)

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

An Emission Control Service.

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

(Continued)

7-25

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km) (Continued)

j Diesel Engine Only: Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty

j
j

conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
Gasoline Engine Only: See “Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator
Check” in the Index.
Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 lbs. or Equipped with Diesel Engine
Only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling
fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.

7-26

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

81,000 Miles (135 000 km)

7-27

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
j Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Diesel Engine Only: Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.
Gasoline Engine Only: See “Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator
Check” in the Index.

7-28

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 lbs. or Equipped with Diesel Engine
j
j

7-29

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)

7-30

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)

j Gasoline Engine Only: Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Gasoline Engine Only: Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle has a diesel

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-31

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
Gasoline Engine Only: Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.

j
j

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,

whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.

7-32

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

D Check fluid level and add fluid as needed.
D If your vehicle has a locking differential, drain fluid
and refill at first engine oil change.

7-33

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

Only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.

7-34

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
j

gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan,
inspect hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-35

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
j Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Diesel Engine Only: Replace engine air cleaner filter.

7-36

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

j Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
j

gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan,
inspect hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.

37,500 Miles (62 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-37

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

Only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan,
inspect hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.

7-38

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle has a diesel

engine, if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly
reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-39

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
j Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Diesel Engine Only: Replace engine air cleaner filter.

7-40

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

j If Equipped: Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system as
j

described in the service manual.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
Gasoline Engine Only: Inspect Evaporative Control System. Check all fuel
and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition.
Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
gaskets are properly sealed and that all hose connections, fasteners and other
components are tight. Also check to be sure that the air cleaner housing is
properly seated and the cover fits tightly. Tighten connections and fasteners or
replace damaged parts as necessary. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan,
inspect hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Diesel Engine Only: Check the crankcase depression regulator valve system
for any worn, plugged or collapsed hoses. See service manual.
An Emission Control Service.

7-41

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

Only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.

7-42

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

82,500 Miles (137 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-43

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. (See footnote **.)
j Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Diesel Engine Only: Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service. Gasoline Engine Only: See “Engine Air
Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check” in the Index.
j Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 lbs. Only: Inspect shields for damage or
looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-44

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

j Diesel Engine Only: Check the air intake system installation to assure that
j

97,500 Miles (162 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-45

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

engine, if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly
reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
j Gasoline Engine Only: Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.

7-46

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-47

Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.

At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel nut
torque. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.

At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.

7-48

Engine Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the
Index for further details.

At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in
the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.

At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check
of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the
spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to
rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the ratchet/wheel
wrench to tighten the cable. See “Storing the Spare Tire
and Tools” in the Index.

Gasoline Engine Only: Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Restriction Indicator Check
Your vehicle has an indicator located on the air cleaner
in the engine compartment that lets you know when the
air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed. Check
indicator at least twice a year or when your engine oil is
changed, whichever occurs first. See “Air Cleaner” in
the Index for more information. Inspect your air cleaner
filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is
used in dusty areas.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. A fluid
loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and
repair if needed.

7-49

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood hinges, hood prop rod pivot, fuel
filler door, rear compartment hinges, latches, locks,
hood latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring
anchor, release pawl and any moving seat hardware.
Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment.

CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.

7-50

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

D The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).

D The key should come out only in LOCK.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.

7-51

Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check

CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.

D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With

the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.

D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.

Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

7-52

Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.

Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.

Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.

Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings
and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the
radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and
pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.

7-53

Throttle System Inspection
(Gasoline Engine)
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.

Rear Axle Service
Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and add if
needed. See “Rear Axle” in the Index. A fluid loss may
indicate a problem. Check the axle and repair it if needed.

7-54

Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits
or conditions result in frequent braking.

Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Oil
(Gasoline
Engine)

Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Oil
(Diesel Engine)

Engine oil with the letters CH-4 or
CG-4 is best for your vehicle. The
CH-4 or CG-4 designation may
appear either alone, or in
combination with other API
designations, such as API
CH-4/SJ, CG-4/SH or
CH-4/CG-4/SJ. These letters show
American Petroleum Institute
(API) levels of quality. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s diesel engine,
see “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and use only GM
GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or
HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index.

7-55

USAGE
Hydraulic
Brake System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Parking Brake
Cable Guides

Power
Steering System
Automatic
Transmission

7-56

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).

GM OptikleenR Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Key Lock
Cylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Chassis
Lubrication

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent)
or lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.

Front Wheel
Bearings

Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category GC or GC-LB (GM
Part No. 1051344 or equivalent).

Rear Axle
(Standard
Differential)

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. 1052271
or equivalent).

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

USAGE

Rear Axle
(Locking
Differential)

Axle Lubricant; use only GM
Part No. 1052271. Do not add
friction modifier.

Propshaft
Splines and
Universal Joints

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent)
or lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.

Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl

One-Piece
Propshaft Spline

Spline Lubricant, Special
Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12345879) or lubricant
meeting requirements
of GM 9985830.

FLUID/LUBRICANT

LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Weatherstrip
Conditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).

Weatherstrip
Squeaks

Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12371287 or equivalent).

7-57

Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the
boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or
“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record
DATE

7-58

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Maintenance Record
DATE

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-59

Maintenance Record
DATE

7-60

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7

Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance

8-8
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11

Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Owner Publications in Canada

8-1

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.

8-2

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:

D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available

from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have
a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should
file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce
any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

8-3

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.

8-4

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.

United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR (243-8872)

From:
Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

313-381-0022 (Fax Number)

Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
0-1-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
When calling from outside Canada, please dial
1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

8-5

Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program

If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone,
our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer
recommended service providers. Roadside membership
is free; however some services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:

D Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
D Free towing for warranty repairs
D Basic over-the-phone technical advice
D Available dealer services at reasonable costs

To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2001 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872).
This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone
roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.

8-6

(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,
glass repair, etc.)
ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:
D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)

D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)

Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 2001 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2001 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services
must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.

For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem

Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.

The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.

8-7

Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.

8-8

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a
destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to
a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

Additional Program Information

Warranty Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.

8-9

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.

8-10

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS

Ordering Owner Publications
in Canada

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Owner’s manuals are available for purchase for all
current and most past model General Motors vehicles.

Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Service manuals may be purchased from Helm
Incorporated using the ordering information on the
following pages. Please note that prices are quoted in
U.S. dollars.

8-11

2001 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2001 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2001 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00

SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207

8-12

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

2
0
0
1

PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

VEHICLE MODEL
NAME

YEAR

QTY.

PRICE
EACH*

Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair

2001

$120.00

2001

$50.00

Owner’s Manual In Portfolio

2001

$20.00

Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio

2001

$15.00

TOTAL
PRICE

G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME)

(ATTENTION)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY)

(STATE)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

(ZIP CODE)

(

)

AREA CODE

GM-CHE-ORD99

*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T

Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)

TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing

MasterCard
VISA

$6.00

Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)

GRAND TOTAL

Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:

Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.

8-13

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : 1st Edition Owner's Manual
Description                     : Owner's Manual
Modified                        : 2014:11:03 09:41:58.796-05:00
Creator                         : Copyright General Motors Corp. 2000
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 2976410
Author                          : Copyright General Motors Corp. 2000
Extracted                       : 2014:11:02 09:37:33.946-06:00
Sha 1                           : b452929ac48cfb31d8e6e5c51b66021e9213feea
Modify Date                     : 2000:04:17 10:44:04-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2000:04:17 10:44:04-05:00
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2001/chevrolet/express_van
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 412

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Chevrolet 2001 Express Van Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation